Marantz AV7005 User guide

Add to my manuals
128 Pages

advertisement

Marantz AV7005 User guide | Manualzz

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1

ESPAÑOL FRANÇAIS ENGLISH

AV Pre Tuner

AV7005

2010/08/23 18:31:54

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:54

n SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

IMPORTANT SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings.

Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

15. Batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

CAUTION:

To completely disconnect this product from the mains, disconnect the plug from the wall socket outlet.

The mains plug is used to completely interrupt the power supply to the unit and must be within easy access by the user.

PRECAUTION:

Pour déconnecter complètement ce produit du courant secteur, débranchez la prise de la prise murale.

La prise secteur est utilisée pour couper complètement l’alimentation de l’appareil et l’utilisateur doit pouvoir y accéder facilement.

PRECAUCIÓN:

Para desconectar completamente este producto de la alimentación eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe del enchufe de la pared.

El enchufe de la alimentación eléctrica se utiliza para interrumpir por completo el suministro de alimentación eléctrica a la unidad y debe de encontrarse en un lugar al que el usuario tenga fácil acceso.

FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)

1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION

Product Name: AV Pre Tuner

Model Number: AV7005

This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Marantz America, Inc.

(a D & M Holdings Company)

100 Corporate Drive,

Mahwah, NJ, 07430, U.S.A.

Tel. (630) 741-0300

2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly approved by Marantz may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

3. IMPORTANT

When connecting this product to network hub or router, use only shielded

STP or ScTP LAN cables which is available at retailer.

Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

4. NOTE

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

For Canadian customers:

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du

Canada.

I

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:31:54

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS n NOTES ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION / NOTAS SOBRE EL USO

WARNINGS

• Avoid high temperatures.

Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack.

• Handle the power cord carefully.

Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.

• Keep the unit free from moisture, water, and dust.

• Unplug the power cord when not using the unit for long periods of time.

• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.

• Do not let foreign objects into the unit.

• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the unit.

• Never disassemble or modify the unit in any way.

• Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items, such as newspapers, tablecloths or curtains.

• Naked flame sources such as lighted candles should not be placed on the unit.

• Observe and follow local regulations regarding battery disposal.

• Do not expose the unit to dripping or splashing fluids.

• Do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the unit.

• Do not handle the mains cord with wet hands.

• When the switch is in the OFF position, the equipment is not completely switched off from

MAINS.

• The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power supply is easily accessible.

AVERTISSEMENTS

• Eviter des températures élevées.

Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère.

• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution.

Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon.

• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière.

• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes.

• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.

• Ne pas laisser des objets étrangers dans l’appareil.

• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.

• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une manière ou d’une autre.

• Ne pas recouvrir les orifices de ventilation avec des objets tels que des journaux, nappes ou rideaux. Cela entraverait la ventilation.

• Ne jamais placer de flamme nue sur l’appareil, notamment des bougies allumées.

• Veillez à respecter les lois en vigueur lorsque vous jetez les piles usagées.

• L’appareil ne doit pas être exposé à l’eau ou à l’humidité.

• Ne pas poser d’objet contenant du liquide, par exemple un vase, sur l’appareil.

• Ne pas manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec les mains mouillées.

• Lorsque l’interrupteur est sur la position OFF, l’appareil n’est pas complètement déconnecté du

SECTEUR (MAINS).

• L’appareil sera installé près de la source d’alimentation, de sorte que cette dernière soit facilement accessible.

ADVERTENCIAS

• Evite altas temperaturas.

Permite la suficiente dispersión del calor cuando está instalado en la consola.

• Maneje el cordón de energía con cuidado.

Sostenga el enchufe cuando desconecte el cordón de energía.

• Mantenga el equipo libre de humedad, agua y polvo.

• Desconecte el cordón de energía cuando no utilice el equipo por mucho tiempo.

• No obstruya los orificios de ventilación.

• No deje objetos extraños dentro del equipo.

• No permita el contacto de insecticidas, gasolina y diluyentes con el equipo.

• Nunca desarme o modifique el equipo de ninguna manera.

• La ventilación no debe quedar obstruida por haberse cubierto las aperturas con objetos como periódicos, manteles o cortinas.

• No deberán colocarse sobre el aparato fuentes inflamables sin protección, como velas encendidas.

• A la hora de deshacerse de las pilas, respete la normativa para el cuidado del medio ambiente.

• No exponer el aparato al goteo o salpicaduras cuando se utilice.

• No colocar sobre el aparato objetos llenos de líquido, como jarros.

• No maneje el cable de alimentación con las manos mojadas.

• Cuando el interruptor está en la posición OFF, el equipo no está completamente desconectado de la alimentación MAINS.

• El equipo se instalará cerca de la fuente de alimentación de manera que resulte fácil acceder a ella.

n CAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION

PRÉCAUTIONS D’INSTALLATION

EMPLAZAMIENTO DE LA INSTALACIÓN z z z z

Wall

Paroi

Pared z For proper heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space, such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.

• More than 0.3 m (12 in.) is recommended.

• Do not place any other equipment on this unit.

z Pour permettre la dissipation de chaleur requise, n’installez pas cette unité dans un espace confiné tel qu’une bibliothèque ou un endroit similaire.

• Une distance de plus de 0,3 m (12 po) est recommandée.

• Ne placez aucun matériel sur cet appareil.

z Para la dispersión del calor adecuadamente, no instale este equipo en un lugar confinado tal como una librería o unidad similar.

• Se recomienda dejar más de 0,3 m (12 pulg.) alrededor.

• No coloque ningún otro equipo sobre la unidad.

II

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:55

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Getting started

Thank you for purchasing this Marantz product. To ensure proper operation, please read this user guide carefully before using the product.

After reading them, be sure to keep them for future reference.

Contents

Getting started ··············································································1

Accessories ··················································································2

About this manual ·········································································2

Features ························································································2

Cautions on handling ····································································3

Simple version (Simple setup guide)

··························4

Basic version

··········································································13

Connections ·················································································14

Important information ·································································14

Connecting an HDMI-compatible device ····································15

Connecting a TV··········································································17

Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player ················································17

Connecting a DVD player ····························································18

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) ····················18

Connecting a video cassette recorder ········································19

Connecting a digital camcorder ··················································19

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port ·····20

Connecting a CD player ······························································20

Connecting a CD recorder ··························································21

Connecting a record player ·························································21

Connecting an antenna ·······························································22

Connecting a wireless receiver (RX101) ·····································23

Connect a device that has a multichannel output terminal ·········23

Connecting to a home network (LAN) ········································24

Playback (Basic operation) ·························································25

Important information ·································································25

Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player ····································26

Playing a CD player ·····································································26

Playing an iPod® ·········································································27

Playing a USB memory device ····················································28

Tuning in radio stations ·······························································30

Playing a network audio ······························································34

Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode) ··························44

Multi-channel playback ·······························································44

Stereo playback ··········································································46

Direct playback ···········································································46

Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby Headphone playback ·····················46

Advanced version

·······························································47

Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) ·······48

Install ··························································································48

Connect ······················································································49

Set up speakers ··········································································52

Connections (Advanced connection)·········································53

REMOTE CONTROL jacks ··························································53

RS-232C connector ·····································································54

DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks ···················································54

Playback (Advanced operation) ·················································55

Convenient functions ··································································55

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) ··························61

Audio output ···············································································61

Video output ···············································································62

Playback ······················································································62

How to make detailed settings ··················································63

Menu map ··················································································63

Examples of menu and front display ··········································64

Inputting characters ···································································65

Input Setup ·················································································66

Audio/Video Adjust ·····································································72

Manual Setup··············································································77

Information ·················································································88

Other settings ··············································································89

Remote control settings ·····························································89

Switches light illumination on/off ···············································89

Operating the connected devices by remote control unit ······90

Operating AV equipment ····························································90

Registering preset codes ····························································91

Operating components ·······························································92

Operating learn function ·····························································93

Operating macro function ···························································95

Setting the back light ··································································96

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Information

·············································································97

Part names and functions···························································98

Front panel ··················································································98

Display ························································································99

Rear panel ·················································································100

Remote control unit ··································································101

Other information ·····································································103

Trademark information ······························································103

Surround ···················································································104

Relationship between video signals and monitor output ··········108

Explanation of terms ·································································109

Troubleshooting ········································································112

Resetting the microprocessor ··················································115

Specifications ············································································116

List of preset codes

··································End of this manual

1

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:31:55

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Accessories

Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

q User guide ............................................................................... 1 w Warranty card (for USA) .......................................................... 1 e Warranty card (for CANADA) ................................................... 1 r Power cord .............................................................................. 1 t Remote control unit (RC011SR) .............................................. 1 y R03/AAA batteries ................................................................... 2 u Setup microphone (ACM1H) ................................................... 1 i AM loop antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) ........................... 1 o FM indoor antenna (for HD Radio broadcasts) ........................ 1

ITALIANO

Features

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Current feedback amplifi er

This unit uses a high-speed current feedback amplifi er circuit for its preamplifi er so that signals from a Blu-ray Disc player and other equipment that support high-defi nition audio formats can be amplifi ed with high fi delity. The high-speed current feedback amplifi er also reproduces a natural sound space.

r i t o u

Supports HDMI 1.4a with 3D, ARC, Deep Color, x.v.Color , Auto Lipsync and HDMI control function

This unit can output 3D video signals input from a Blu-ray Disc player to a TV that supports a 3D system. This unit also supports the ARC (Audio Return Channel) function, which reproduces TV sound with this unit via an HDMI cable used for connecting the unit and a TV z 1. z 1 The TV should support the ARC function.

About this manual

n

Operation buttons

The operations described in this guide are based mainly on remote control operation.

n

Symbols

v

NOTE

This symbol indicates a reference page on which related information is described.

This symbol indicates a supplementary information and tips for operations.

This symbol indicates a supplementary information and tips for operations.

Internet radio, music and photo streaming via network z 2

This unit can playback audio fi les and still images such as photographs that are stored on your computer via a network. You can also listen to internet radio and a whole host of other online music z 3 that uses network technology.

z 2 An internet connection is required.

z 3 You may be required to sign a service agreement with the companies that provide particular services.

6-HDMI inputs and 2-outputs

The unit is equipped with 6 HDMI input connectors for connecting devices with HDMI connectors, such as a Blu-ray Disc player, game machine, HD video camera, etc.

One of the 6 input connectors of this unit is provided on the front panel so that you can easily connect and display images and videos recorded in a digital still camera or digital video camera.

Audyssey DSX™

This unit is equipped with Audyssey DSX decoder. By connecting front height speakers to the power amp and using Audyssey DSX playback, you can experience a more power playback expression in the height audio range. By connecting front wide speakers, you can experience a more powerful playback expression in the wide audio range.

Easy to use, Graphical User Interface

This unit is equipped with an easy to see “Graphical User

Interface” that uses menu displays and levels. The use of level displays increases operability of the unit.

All sources are up-scaled to 1080p

The unit is provided with an HDMI video up-scaling function that converts an analog video signal input to the unit to a 1080p (HD resolution) signal and supplies it to a TV via the HDMI connector.

This enables the unit and a TV connected with a single HDMI cable and any video source to be reproduced precisely with HD level of quality.

Direct play for iPod® and iPhone® via USB

Music data from an iPod can be played back if you connect the

USB cable supplied with the iPod via the USB port of this unit, and also an iPod can be controlled with the remote control unit for this unit.

M-XPort (Marantz-eXtension Port)

This unit is equipped with the M-XPort, a Marantz original innovation that provides outstanding expandability. You can connect the

Wireless Receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this port. n

Illustrations

Note that the illustrations in these instructions are for explanation purposes and may differ from the actual unit.

High defi nition audio support

The unit is equipped with a decoder which supports high-quality digital audio format for Blu-ray Disc players such as Dolby TrueHD,

DTS-HD Master Audio, etc.

UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal for front height channel

This unit is equipped with a dedicated UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal on the rear panel. You can enjoy 7.1-channel playback using the front height channel and 7.1-channel playback using the surround back channel, without having to reconnect the speakers.

2

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:31:57

Other features

• Dolby Virtual Speaker (vpage 46)

• Dolby Headphone (vpage 46)

• DTS Neural Surround (vpage 45)

Features

Remote Power Control

This unit is equipped with a remote power control function. When a Marantz Power Amplifi er MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is connected to this unit, this unit’s power can be switched ON/OFF together with the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 power supply.

Connection to the MM8003 or MM7055 or MM7025 is a ground fl oating connection that prevents negative infl uences on sound quality as far as possible.

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Cautions on handling

Before turning the power switch on

Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are no problems with the connection cables.

• Power is supplied to some of the circuitry even when the unit is set to the standby mode. When going on vacation or leaving home for long periods of time, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

About condensation

If there is a major difference in temperature between the inside of the unit and the surroundings, condensation (dew) may form on the operating parts inside the unit, causing the unit not to operate properly.

If this happens, let the unit sit for an hour or two with the power turned off and wait until there is little difference in temperature before using the unit.

Cautions on using mobile phones

Using a mobile phone near this unit may result in noise. If that occurs, move the mobile phone away from this unit when it is in use.

Moving the unit

Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Next, disconnect the connection cables to other system units before moving the unit.

About Care

• Wipe the cabinet and control panel clean with a soft cloth.

• Follow the instructions when using a chemical cleaner.

• Benzene, paint thinner or other organic solvents as well as insecticide may cause material changes and discoloration if brought into contact with the unit, and should therefore not be used.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 3

3

2010/08/23 18:31:57

ENGLISH

Simple version

DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Simple version (Simple setup guide)

Here, we explain the entire setup procedure, from unboxing the unit to using it in a home theater.

The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers. For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.

n

Before connecting the unit, turn off the power to all devices.

n

For operation of the connected devices, refer to the user manuals for each device.

1

Install

(vpage 5)

2

Connect

(vpage 5)

3

Turn on power

(vpage 7)

4

Set up speakers

(vpage 8)

5

Play back disc

(vpage 12)

4

Enjoy better audio, using the correct install method.

Connect 7.1-channel speakers, a TV and

Blu-ray Disc player equipped with an HDMI connector.

Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)

STEP 1

Preparation

STEP 2

Speaker

Detection

STEP 3

Measurement

STEP 4

Calculation

Use the setup microphone

(ACM1H) included with the product, for automatic setup.

Enjoy Blu-ray Disc and DVD in surround sound.

STEP 5

Check

STEP 6

Store Finish

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 4 2010/08/23 18:31:59

1

Install

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

1 2 3 4 5

2

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Connect

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

1 2 3 4 5

This unit can perform 2.0/2.1 to 7.1-channel surround playback.

This page provides the speaker installation procedure for the

7.1-channel playback using surround back speakers as an example.

The default setting is 7.1-channel. You can also perform 5.1-channel playback.

To perform 5.1-channel playback, connect5.1-channel speakers only.

Use Audyssey Auto Setup function of this unit to automatically detect the number of connected speakers and perform optimal settings for the speakers to be used.

Power amp

• Connect a power amp (sold separately) to the PRE OUT terminal of this unit.

• This unit has an UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminal and BALANCED PRE OUT terminal. Connect to the correct terminal for your power amp.

• Connect the speakers to the power amp.

• For details on speaker connections, see the User Guide for the power amp.

FL

SW

FR

C

90 – 110˚

22 – 30˚

135 – 150˚

SL SR

SBL

Listening position

SBR

FL Front speaker (L)

FR Front speaker (R)

C Center speaker

SW Subwoofer

SL Surround speaker (L)

SR Surround speaker (R)

SBL Surround back speaker (L)

SBR Surround back speaker (R)

• Install the surround speakers in a position 2 to

3 ft (60 to 90 cm) higher than ear level.

Front speaker

Surround speaker

2 – 3 ft /

60 – 90 cm

Surround back speaker

• Point slightly downwards

G Viewed from the sideH

The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.

For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 5

5

2010/08/23 18:32:00

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Connect n

Example of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025 power amp

Connecting the unbalanced PRE OUT terminal

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Connecting the balanced PRE OUT terminal

Audio cable

(sold separately)

Audio cable

(sold separately)

6

G MM7025H

G MM7055H

SL

G MM7025H

FL

SW

Subwoofer with built-in amplifier

C

FR

SBL

SR

SBR

Speaker cables

(sold separately)

G MM7055H

SL

FL

SW

Subwoofer with built-in amplifier

C

FR

SBL

SR

SBR

Speaker cables

(sold separately)

G AV7005 XLR connector PIN

arrangementH

1 2

3 q GND (Ground) w HOT (Hot) e COLD (Cold)

The PIN arrangement in this device uses the European method.

In the USA method, is HOT.

w is COLD, and e

When connecting a device that utilizes the USA type of PIN arrangement, replace the w and e balanced cable.

plugs on one side of the

NOTE

Do not short the HOT and GND or COLD and GND for use.

The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.

For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 6 2010/08/23 18:32:03

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Connect 3

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS

Turn on power

Blu-ray Disc player and TV

Use only an HDMI (High Defi nition Multimedia Interface) cable that bears the HDMI logo (a genuine HDMI product). Using a cable without the HDMI logo (a non-genuine

HDMI product) may result in abnormal playback.

When outputting Deep Color or 1080p, etc., we recommend you use a “High Speed

HDMI cable” or a “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”for enhanced high-quality playback.

TV

1 Turn on the TV and subwoofer power.

Blu-ray Disc player

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

IN

Power on

2 Change the TV input to the input of this unit.

3 Press ON to turn on power to the unit.

The power indicator switches off, and power is supplied to the unit.

Power on

HDMI cable

(sold separately)

HDMI cable

(sold separately)

DEUTSCH ENGLISH

1 2 3 4 5

Power on

To household power outlet

(AC 120 V, 60 Hz)

Power cord

(supplied)

NOTE

Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.

• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in humming or noise.

4 Turn on the power amp power.

NOTE

Before you use the remote control unit for the fi rst time, be sure to insert the batteries (vpage 102

“Inserting the batteries”).

7

2010/08/23 18:32:07 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 7

4

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)

SVENSKA

1 2 3 4 5

The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called “Audyssey Auto Setup”.

To perform measurement, place the setup microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions).

• When performing Audyssey Auto Setup, MultEQ® XT/

Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® functions become active

(vpage 74, 75).

• To set up the speakers manually, use “Speaker Setup”

(vpage 78) on the menu.

About setup microphone placement

• Measurements are performed by placing the setup microphone successively at multiple positions throughout the entire listening area, as shown in

G Example qH. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions).

• Even if the listening environment is small as shown in GExample wH, measuring at multiple points throughout the listening environment results in more effective correction.

G Example qH

FL SW C FR

G Example wH

FL SW C FR

( : Measuring positions) ( : Measuring positions)

NOTE

• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room measurements. Close windows, silence cell phones, televisions, radios, air conditioners, fl uorescent lights, home appliances, light dimmers, or other devices as measurements may be affected by these sounds.

• Cell phones should be placed away from all audio electronics during the measurement process as Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) may cause measurement disruptions (even if the cell phone is not in use).

• Do not unplug the setup microphone from the main unit until Audyssey Auto

Setup is completed.

• Do not stand between the speakers and setup microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. This will cause inaccurate readings.

• Loud test sounds may be played during Audyssey

Auto setup. This is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in room, these test signals will increase in volume.

• Operating VOLUME +, – during the measurements will cancel the measurements.

• Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected.

SL *M

SBL

FL Front speaker (L)

FR Front speaker (R)

C Center speaker

SW Subwoofer

SBR

SR SL *M

SBL SBR

SL Surround speaker (L)

SR Surround speaker (R)

SBL Surround back speaker (L)

SBR Surround back speaker (R)

SR

About the main listening position (*M)

The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey Auto Setup, place the setup microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ® XT uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.

1

Prepare the setup microphone

Mount the setup microphone on a tripod or stand and place it in the main listening position.

When placing the setup microphone, adjust the height of the sound receptor to the level of the listener’s ear.

Sound receptor

Setup microphone

NOTE

• Do not hold the setup microphone in your hand during measurements.

• Avoid placing the setup microphone close to a seat back or wall as sound refl ections may give inaccurate results.

8

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 8

The “Simple version” section provides the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods for the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers.

For the installing, connecting, and setup methods of speakers other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers), see page 48.

2010/08/23 18:32:08

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)

2

Set up the subwoofer

If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below.

n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode

Set the direct mode to “On” and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.

n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode

Make the following settings:

Volume : “12 o’clock position”

Crossover frequency : “Maximum/Highest

Frequency”

Low pass fi lter : “Off”

Standby mode : “Off”

NOTE

When you use two subwoofers, please adjust the subwoofer volume controls individually so that each subwoofer level is as close as possible to 75 dB using the test tone (vpage 79) before

Audyssey Auto Setup.

3

Set up the remote control unit

n Set up the operation mode

Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifi er operation mode.

STEP 1

Preparation

4 Connect the setup microphone to the

SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

When the setup microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP1 Preparation

Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.

Set the following items if necessary.

Amp Assign

Channel Select

Auto Setup Start

ENTER Enter

Start Auto Setup

MultEQ XT

RETURN

[1/6]

Cancel

This screen provides the method for setting up 7.1-channel playback using surround back speakers. For the method of setting up speakers other than the 7.1-channel system, select “Amp

Assign” and perform step 3 and 4 of “Set up

“Amp Assign”” (vpage 52).

If unused channels are set with “Channel

Select”, measuring time can be shortened. For setting, perform steps 5 to 9 of “Set up “Channel

Select”” (vpage 52).

5 Use ui to select “Auto Setup Start” and then press ENTER .

STEP 2

Speaker Detection

• In STEP 2, you will perform measurements at the main listening position.

• This step automatically checks the speaker confi guration and speaker size, and calculates the channel level, distance, and crossover frequency.

It also corrects distortion in the listening area.

6 Select “Measure” and then press

ENTER .

When measuring begins, a test tone is output from each speaker.

• Measurement requires several minutes.

7 The detected speakers are displayed.

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP2 Spkr Detect Check

Front

Center

Subwoofer

Surround

S.Back

F.Height

F.Wide

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

2spkrs

No

No

Retry

Next Measurement

MultEQ XT

[2/6]

ENTER Enter RETURN

Go to Step 3 (Measurement) after speaker check

Cancel

NOTE

If “Caution” is displayed:

Go to “Error messages” (vpage  11), check any related items, and perform the necessary procedures.

If the problem is resolved, return and restart

“Audyssey Auto Setup”.

When performing Audyssey Auto

Setup over again

Press ui to select “Retry”, and then press ENTER .

When measuring has stopped

Press RETURN , to the “Cancel Auto Setup?” prompt is displayed.

Press o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER .

Setting up the speakers again

Repeat the operation from step 4 of

STEP1 Preparation .

NOTE

If a connected speaker is not displayed, the speaker may not be connected correctly. Check the speaker connection.

8 Use ui to select “Next 1

Measurement” and then press ENTER .

Press AMP

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu

9

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 9 2010/08/23 18:32:08

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)

STEP 3

Measurement

ITALIANO

STEP 4

Calculation

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

STEP 5

Check

SVENSKA

STEP 6

Store

• In STEP 3, you will perform measurements at multiple positions (two to eight positions) other than the main listening position.

• You can achieve a more effective correction of distortion within the listening area by performing measurements at multiple positions.

9 Move the setup microphone to position 2, use ui to select

“Measure”, and then press ENTER .

The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP3 Measurement

Please place the microphone at ear height at 2nd listening position.

MultEQ XT

[3/6]

11

On the STEP3 screen, use ui

to select “Next 1 Calculation”, and then press ENTER .

Measuring results are analyzed, and the frequency response of each speaker in the listening room is determined.

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP4 Calculation

Now calculating...

Please wait.

MultEQ XT

[4/6]

25%

Measure

Next Calculation

ENTER Enter RETURN

Start next measurement. Test Tone will start

Cancel

• Analysis takes several minutes to complete. The time required for this analysis depends on the number of speakers connected.

The more connected speakers there are, the longer it takes to perform analysis.

If you want to omit measurements from the next position onward, select “Next 1 Calculation”.

(Go to STEP4 Calculation )

10 Repeat step 9, measuring positions 3 to 8.

When measurement of position 8 is completed, a “Measurements fi nished.” message is displayed.

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP3 Measurement

Measurements finished.

MultEQ XT

[3/6]

12 Use ui to select the item you want to check, and then press ENTER .

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP5 Check

Check processing results. To proceed,press

“Next”

Spkr Config Check

Distance Check

Ch. Level Check

Crossover Check

Next Store

Select item to check

ENTER Enter

MultEQ XT

RETURN

[5/6]

Cancel

• Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.

• If you want to check another item, press

RETURN .

13 Use ui to select “Next 1 Store” and then press ENTER .

14 Select “Store” and then press

Save the measurement results.

ENTER .

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT

STEP6 Store

Press “Store” to store calculation results.

[6/6]

Store

ENTER Enter

Apply and store measurement result

RETURN Cancel

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP6 Store

Now storing...

Please wait.

25%

MultEQ XT

[6/6]

NOTE

• If the result differs from the actual connection status, or if “Caution!” is displayed, see “Error messages” (vpage 11). Then carry out Audyssey

Auto Setup again.

• If the result still differs from the actual connection status after remeasurement or the error message still appears, it is possible that the speakers are not connected properly. Turn this unit off, check the speaker connections and repeat the measurement process from the beginning.

• If you change speaker positions or orientation, perform Audyssey Auto Setup again to fi nd the optimal equalizer settings.

• Saving the results requires about 10 seconds.

• If the measuring results are not to be saved, press RETURN . A message “Cancel Auto

Setup?” will be displayed. Press o then select

“Yes”. All the measured Audyssey Auto Setup data will be erased.

NOTE

During saving of measurement results, be sure not to turn off the power.

10

Retry

Next Calculation

ENTER

Proceed to Step 4 (Analyze)

Enter RETURN Cancel

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 10 2010/08/23 18:32:09

Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)

Finish

15

16

Unplug the setup microphone from the unit’s SETUP MIC jack.

Set Dynamic Volume®.

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

Finish

Storing complete.

Auto Setup is now finished. Please unplug microphone.

Turn on Dynamic Volume?

Yes No

MultEQ XT

[6/6]

ENTER Exit

Turn Dynamic Volume on and exit Auto Setup

• For details of Dynamic Volume settings, see page 75.

n When turning Dynamic Volume on

Use o to select “Yes“, and then press ENTER .

• The unit automatically enters “Heavy” mode.

n When turning Dynamic Volume off

Use p to select “No“, and then press ENTER .

NOTE

After performing Audyssey Auto Setup, do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey

Auto Setup again.

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Error messages

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

An error message is displayed if Audyssey® Auto Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If this happens, check the relevant items, be sure to take the necessary measures, then perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again.

NOTE

Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.

Examples

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT

Caution!

No microphone or Speaker

Error details

• The connected setup microphone is broken, or a device other than the supplied setup microphone is connected.

• Not all speakers could be detected.

• The front L speaker was not properly detected.

Measures

• Connect the included setup microphone to the

SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

• Check the speaker connections.

Retry

RETURN Cancel

Check cause of problem!

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP MultEQ XT

Caution!

Ambient noise is too high or Level is too low

Check cause of problem!

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

Front R

Caution!

None

Retry

Retry

RETURN Cancel

MultEQ XT

• There is too much noise in the room for accurate measurements to be made.

• Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low for accurate measurements to be made.

• Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away.

• Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.

• Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.

• Adjust the subwoofer’s volume.

• The displayed speaker could not be detected.

• Check the connections of the displayed speaker.

RETURN Cancel

Check cause of problem!

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

Front L

Caution!

Phase

MultEQ XT

• The displayed is connected with the polarities reversed.

• Check the polarities of the displayed speaker.

• For some speakers, this error message may be displayed even if the speaker is properly connected.

If you are sure the connection is correct, press ui to select “Skip”, then press ENTER .

Retry

Skip

Check cause of problem!

RETURN Cancel

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu

11

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 11 2010/08/23 18:32:09

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Parameter Check

FRANÇAIS

This function enables you to check the measurement results and equalizer characteristics after Audyssey Auto Setup.

1 Use ui to select “Parameter Check” and then press ENTER or p .

2 Use ui to select the item you want to check, then press ENTER or p .

Measurement results for each speaker are displayed.

AUTO SETUP

PARAMETER CHECK

Speaker Config Check

Distance Check

Channel Level Check

Crossover Check

EQ Check

Restore

Show speaker configuration result

Check the speaker confi guration.

Speaker Confi g. Check

Check the distance.

Distance Check

Check the channel level.

Channel Level Check

Check the crossover frequency.

Crossover Check

Check the equalizer.

EQ Check

• If “EQ Check” is selected in step 2, press ui to select equalizing curve (“Audyssey” or “Audyssey Flat”) to be checked.

Use o p to switch the display between the different speakers.

3 Press RETURN .

The confi rmation screen reappears. Repeat steps 2.

ITALIANO

5

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

Play back disc

SVENSKA

1 Press BD two times in a row to switch an input source for a player used for playback.

2 Play the component connected to this unit.

Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting, subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.

3 Adjust the sound volume.

VOLUME + ..................................... Volume up

VOLUME – ................................ Volume down

MUTE .................................................. Muting

4 Set the listening mode.

Set the listening mode according to the playback contents

(cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking (vpage  44

“Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)”).

When power is switched to standby

Press STANDBY .

G Power indicator status in standby modeH

• Normal standby : Red

• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” :

Orange

• When “Network Standby” is set to “ON” :

Orange

You can also switch the power to standby by pressing ON/STANDBY on the main unit.

1 2 3 4 5

NOTE

During power standby, a minimal amount of power is consumed. To totally cut off the power, remove the power cord from the power outlet.

Retrieving Audyssey Auto Setup settings

If you set “Restore” to “Yes”, you can return to Audyssey Auto Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ® XT) even when you have changed each setting manually.

12

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 12

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confi rm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:32:10

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 13

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH

Basic version

Basic version

Here, we explain the connections and basic operation methods for this unit.

ENGLISH

F

Connections vpage 14

F

Playback (Basic operation) vpage 25

F

Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode) vpage 44

n

Refer to the pages indicated below for information on connecting and playing back the various media and external devices.

Audio and Video

TV

Blu-ray Disc player

DVD player

Video cassette recorder

Set-top box (Satellite tuner or cable TV)

Game console

Digital camcorder

Audio iPod®

USB memory device

CD player

CD recorder

Record player

SIRIUS satellite radio

HD Radio receiver

Wireless receiver (RX101)

Network

Network

Connection v page 16, 17 v page 16, 17 v page 16, 18 v page 16, 19 v page 16, 18 v page 16 v page 19

Connection v page 20 v page 20 v page 20 v page 21 v page 21 v page 22 v page 22 v page 23

Connection v page 24

Playback

– v page 26 v page 26

Playback v page 27 v page 28 v page 26

– v page 30 v page 32

Playback v page 34

For speaker connections, see page 5.

13

2010/08/23 18:32:10

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Connections

FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Important information

Make connections as follows before using this unit. Select an appropriate connection type according to the components to be connected.

You may need to make some settings on this unit depending on the connection method. Refer to each description for more information.

Select the cables (sold separately) according to the components being connected.

NOTE

• Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components being connected.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).

• Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.

Converting input video signals for output

(Video conversion function)

This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, Component video and video) and three types of video output connectors (HDMI, Component video and video).

Use the connectors corresponding to the components to be connected.

This function automatically converts various formats of video signals input to this unit into the formats used to output the video signals from this unit to a monitor.

G Flow of video signals for MAIN ZONEH

This unit

Video device

Monitor

Output

HDMI connector

Component video connectors

Input

(IN)

HDMI connector

Component video connectors

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

HDMI connector

Component video connectors

Input

HDMI connector

Component video connectors

Video device

Output

Component video connectors

Video connector

G Flow of video signals for ZONE2H

This unit

Input

(IN)

Component video connectors

Video connector in Set as Necessary

• Set when not using the video conversion function.

“Video Convert” (vpage 70)

• Set when changing the resolution of the video signal.

“Resolution” (vpage 70)

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Component video connectors (OUT2/ZONE2)

Video connector

Monitor

Input

Component video connectors

Video connector

• The video conversion function supports the NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC 4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60 formats.

• The resolution of the video signal input to this unit’s HDMI connector is the one set at “Resolution”

(vpage 70). (1080p HDMI signals and 1080p component signals are output at 1080p, regardless of the setting.)

• Resolutions of HDMI-compatible TVs can be checked at “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI

Monitor 2 Information” (vpage 88).

NOTE

• HDMI signals cannot be converted into analog signals.

• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate.

• Component video input signals cannot be converted into Video format.

• A menu is output via the HDMI connector or component video connector.

• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal output, set “Input Setup” – “Input

Assign” – “Component” (vpage 69) in the menu to “ZONE2”.

Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector

14

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 14 2010/08/23 18:32:10

Examples of screen display

• Menu screen • Status display screen

When the input source is switched

MENU

Audio/Video Adjust

Information

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Input Setup

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Important information

When the volume is adjusted

Adjust various audio and video parameters

Input

Mode

BD

STEREO

Auto Master Volume -80.0dB

Status display: The operating status appears briefly on the screen when the input source is switched or the volume is changed.

NOTE

• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.

• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.

Connecting an HDMI-compatible device

You can connect up to six HDMI-compatible devices to the unit.

HDMI function

This unit supports the following HDMI functions:

• 3D

• Deep Color (vpage 109)

• Auto Lip Sync (vpage 80, 109)

• x.v.Color, sYCC601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color (vpage 109, 111)

• High definition digital audio format

• ARC (Audio Return Channel)

• Content Type

• CEC (HDMI control)

Copyright protection system

In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD-Video or DVD-Video via HDMI connection, both this unit and TV or the player need to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV device. This unit supports HDCP.

• If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio are not output correctly. Read the user guide of your television or player for more information.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

About HDMI cables

• When a device supporting Deep Color signal transfer is connected, use a cable compatible “High Speed

HDMI cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.

• When the ARC function is used, connect a device with a ”Standard HDMI cable with Ethernet” or “High

Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet” for HDMI 1.4a.

HDMI control function (vpage 55)

This function allows you to operate external devices from this unit and operate this unit from external devices.

NOTE

• The HDMI control function may not work depending on the device it is connected to and its settings.

• You cannot operate a TV or Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player that is not compatible with the HDMI control function.

About 3D function

This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of the HDMI 1.4a standards.

For playing the 3D video content, a player, and a TV that support the 3D function of the HDMI 1.4a standards are required in addition to this unit.

NOTE

• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.

• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.

About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function

The Audio Return Channel in HDMI 1.4a enables a TV, via a single HDMI cable, to send audio data “upstream” to this unit.

NOTE

• To enable the ARC function, set “HDMI Control” to “ON” (vpage 80).

• ARC function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order to use the ARC function, connect the television to the HDMI OUT 1 connector.

• When connecting a TV that does not support the ARC function, a separate connection using an audio cable is required. In this case, refer to “Connecting a TV” (vpage 17) for the connection method.

About Content Type

The HDMI specification version 1.4a enables simple, automated picture setting selection with no user intervention.

NOTE

To enable the Content Type, set “Video Mode” to “Auto” (vpage 70).

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 15

15

2010/08/23 18:32:10

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Connecting an HDMI-compatible device

Cables used for connections

Audio and video cable (sold separately)

HDMI cable

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

• This interface allows transfer of digital video signals and digital audio signals over a single HDMI cable.

Blu-ray

Disc player

DVD player

Set-top box

Video cassette recorder

Game console TV 1 TV 2

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

OUT

HDMI

IN

HDMI

IN

Digital camcorder

HDMI

OUT

G Rear panelH

G Front panelH

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

• When this unit is connected to other devices with HDMI cables, connect this unit and TV also with an

HDMI cable.

• When connecting a device that supports Deep Color transmission, please use a “High Speed HDMI cable” or “High Speed HDMI cable with Ethernet”.

• Video signals are not output if the input video signals do not match the monitor’s resolution. In this case, switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s resolution to a resolution with which the monitor is compatible.

• When this unit and monitor are connected with an HDMI cable, if the monitor is not compatible with

HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor.

NOTE

• The HDMI signal is not simultaneously output to HDMI 1 and HDMI 2. Select the connector that you want to use in advance using “Monitor Out” (vpage 80) in the menu, or by pressing the HDMI

HDMI OUT button on the main unit.

button on the remote control unit or the

• HDMI control function is only supported for the HDMI OUT 1 connector. In order to use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the HDMI OUT 1 connector.

• The audio signal from the HDMI output connector (sampling frequency, number of channels, etc.) may be limited by the HDMI audio specifications of the connected device regarding permissible inputs.

• The front panel HDMI input connector is displayed as “HDMI6” in the “Input

Setup” – “Input Assign” (vpage 68) in the menu.

Connecting to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector

When an HDMI/DVI conversion cable (sold separately) is used, the HDMI video signals are converted to

DVI signals, allowing connection to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector.

NOTE

• No sound is output when connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector. Make separate audio connections.

• Signals cannot be output to DVI-D devices that do not support HDCP.

• Depending on the combination of devices, the video signals may not be output.

n

Settings related to HDMI connections

Set as necessary. For details, see the respective reference pages.

Input Assign (vpage 68)

Set this to change the HDMI input connector to which the input source is assigned.

HDMI Setup (vpage 80)

Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.

• RGB Range • Auto Lip Sync

• HDMI Control • Standby Source

• HDMI Audio Out

• Power Off Control

• Monitor Out

NOTE

The audio signals output from the HDMI connectors are only the HDMI input signals.

16

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 16 2010/08/23 18:32:12

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Connecting a TV

• Select the connector to use and connect the device.

• For video connections, see “Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”

(vpage 14).

• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).

To listen to TV audio through this device, use the optical digital connection.

NOTE

This connection is not required when a TV compatible with the ARC function (Audio Return Channel (HDMI

1.4a standard function) is connected to this unit via an HDMI connection.

For details, see “About ARC (Audio Return Channel) function” (vpage 15) or refer to the instruction manual for your TV.

Cables used for connections

Video cable (sold separately)

Video cable (Yellow)

Component video cable

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cable (sold separately)

Y

P

B

P

R

Optical cable

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player

• You can enjoy video and audio from a Blu-ray Disc.

• Select the connector to use and connect the device.

• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).

Cables used for connections

Video cable (sold separately)

Video cable (Yellow)

Component video cable

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cables (sold separately)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

L

R

Blu-ray Disc player

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

OUT

Y P B P R

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

AUDIO

L

OUT

R

L R

TV

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

IN

P

B

P

R

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO

OPTICAL

OUT

L R in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

For HD audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus and DTS Express) playback, connect with HDMI

(vpage 15 “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device”).

in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 17

17

2010/08/23 18:32:15

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Connecting a DVD player

• You can enjoy video and audio from a DVD.

• Select the connector to use and connect the device.

• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).

Cables used for connections

Video cable (sold separately)

Video cable (Yellow)

Component video cable

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cables (sold separately)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

L

R

Coaxial digital cable

(Black)

DVD player

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

OUT

P B P R

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

L

OUT

R

AUDIO

COAXIAL

OUT

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV)

• You can watch satellite or cable TV.

• Select the connector to use and connect the device.

• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device” (vpage 15).

Cables used for connections

Video cable (sold separately)

Video cable (Yellow)

Component video cable

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cables (sold separately)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

L

R

Coaxial digital cable

(Black)

Satellite tuner/Cable TV

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

OUT

P

B

P

R

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

COAXIAL

OUT

AUDIO

OUT

L R

L R

L R

L R

L R in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68) in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

18

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 18 2010/08/23 18:32:19

Connecting a video cassette recorder

• You can record video onto a video cassette tape.

• Select the connector to use and connect the device.

• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.

• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMIcompatible device” (vpage 15).

Cables used for connections

Video cable (sold separately)

Video cable (Yellow)

Component video cable

Audio cable

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Y

P

B

P

R

Audio cable (sold separately)

(White)

(Red)

L

R

Y

P

B

P

R

L

R

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector or component video input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

NOTE

To record video signals through this unit, use the same type of video cable for connection between this unit and the player as used for connection between this unit and the recorder.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Connecting a digital camcorder

• You can enjoy video and audio from a digital camcorder.

• You can enjoy games by connecting a game machine via the AUX1 input connector. In this case, select the input source to “AUX1”.

• For instructions on HDMI connections, see “Connecting an HDMIcompatible device” (vpage 15).

Cables used for connections

Video cable (sold separately)

Video cable (Yellow)

Audio cable (sold separately)

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

L

R

Optical cable

Video cassette recorder

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y

OUT

P

B

P

R

VIDEO

OUT

AUDIO

AUDIO

L

OUT

R

VIDEO

VIDEO

IN

AUDIO

AUDIO

IN

L R

Digital camcorder

VIDEO

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT

AUDIO

AUDIO

OUT

L R

L R

L R L R

L R

L R L R in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

The front panel OPTICAL input terminal is displayed as “OPT3” in the

“Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage 68) in the menu.

NOTE

When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this case, use the monitor output of the same connector as the input.

19

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 19 2010/08/23 18:32:22

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port

You can enjoy music stored on an iPod or USB memory device.

Cables used for connections

To connect an iPod to this unit, use the USB cable supplied with the iPod.

USB memory device or iPod

Supported iPod models

Made for

• iPod touch (2nd generation)

• iPod touch (1st generation)

• iPod classic

• iPod with video

• iPod nano (5th generation)

• iPod nano (4th generation)

• iPod nano (3rd generation)

• iPod nano (2nd generation)

• iPod nano (1st generation)

• iPhone

• iPhone 3G

• iPhone 3GS

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Connecting a CD player

• You can enjoy CD sound.

• Select the connector to use and connect the device.

Cables used for connections

Audio cable (sold separately)

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

Optical cable

L

R

CD player

AUDIO

AUDIO

L

OUT

R

OPTICAL

OUT

L R

L R

Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB connection type HDD of the kind to which an AC adapter can be connected to supply power, use the AC adapter.

NOTE

• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.

• Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

20

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 20 2010/08/23 18:32:25

SVENSKA

Connecting a CD recorder

• You can record audio on a CD or cassette tape.

• Select the connector to use and connect the device.

• When recording analog audio, use the analog connection.

Cables used for connections

Audio cable (sold separately)

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

Optical cable

L

R

CD recorder

AUDIO

AUDIO

L

OUT

R

OPTICAL

OUT

OPTICAL

IN

AUDIO

AUDIO

IN

L R

NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS

Connecting a record player

You can enjoy playing records.

Cables used for connections

Audio cable (sold separately)

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

L

R

Turntable (MM cartridge)

L R L R

AUDIO

OUT

L R

GND

L R L R

DEUTSCH ENGLISH in Set as Necessary

Set this to change the digital input connector to which the input source is assigned.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

To perform digital recording using the digital connector (OPT OUT), assign either one of the digital input connectors to “CDR” by selecting “Input Setup” – “Input Assign” setting (vpage 68).

The above figure shows an example of changing the assignment of OPT1 connector to “CDR”.

• This unit is compatible with record players with an MM cartridge. When you connect to a record player with an MC cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer.

• When you increase the volume without connecting the record player, there may be “booming” noise from the speakers.

NOTE

The SIGNAL GND terminal of this unit is not a safety ground connection. Connect it to reduce noise when noise is excessive. Note that depending on the record player, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.

21

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 21 2010/08/23 18:32:27

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Connecting an antenna

Connecting a SIRIUS connector

• This unit is a SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready® receiver. You can receive SIRIUS® Satellite Radio by connecting to the SiriusConnect

Home Tuner and subscribing to the SIRIUS service.

• Plug the SIRIUS connector on the SIRIUS service.

• Position the Home Tuner antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.

For details, see “Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio” (vpage 30).

When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner.

SiriusConnect Home Tuner

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

NOTE

Keep the power cord unplugged until the SiriusConnect Home Tuner connection have been completed.

n

Positioning the antenna

For a consistent satellite signal, the antenna must be positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.

NORTH

SKY

Connecting an HD Radio receiver

• By connecting a HD Radio antenna to this unit, you can receive

HD Radio programs.

• HD Radio broadcasting currentry is available in the United States and select other countries.

Direction of broadcasting station

FM outdoor antenna

AM loop antenna

(for HD Radio broadcasting, supplied)

• To prevent interference, install at least 3.3 ft/1 m away from the antenna connected to the this unit’s other AM tuner terminal.

When connecting digital audio

WEST q t w e r

EAST

HORIZON

SOUTH

Area 1 Point the antenna toward the sky in the east, northeast, or

southeast, either through a window or outside.

Area 2 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northeast, either through a window or outside.

Area 3 Point the antenna toward the sky in the north or northwest, either through a window or outside.

Area 4 Point the antenna toward the sky in the west, northwest, or

southwest, either through a window or outside.

Area 5 Put the antenna outside and point it straight up. The antenna cannot be used indoors.

75 Ω coaxial cable

FM indoor antenna (for

HD Radio broadcasting, supplied) q

Black

White

Ground w e

AM outdoor antenna in Set as Necessary

When connecting digital of the SiriusConnect Home Tuner, perform the setting “Digital”.

“Input Assign” (vpage 68)

22

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 22 2010/08/23 18:32:31

Connecting an antenna n

AM loop antenna assembly

1 Put the stand section through the bottom of the loop antenna from the rear and bend it forward.

Loop antenna

2 Insert the projecting part into the square hole in the stand.

Stand

Square hole

Projecting part

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Connecting a wireless receiver

(RX101)

By connecting a wireless receiver RX101 (sold separately) to this unit, you can receive and playback audio signals from other devices using the Bluetooth Communication Function.

• Use a Bluetooth device that is A2DP compatible (vpage  109

“A2DP”).

• You can also use wireless receiver RX101 as an external IR receiver.

• For instructions on the wireless receiver settings, refer to the

RX101’s operating instructions.

Wireless receiver RX101

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Connect a device that has a multichannel output terminal

• You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multichannel sound audio output jacks to enjoy music and video.

• The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player (vpage 17 “Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player”).

Cables used for connections

Audio cable (sold separately)

Audio cable

(White)

(Red)

L

R

L

R

Audio cable n

Using the AM loop antenna

Suspending on a wall

Suspend directly on a wall without assembling.

Blu-ray Disc player / DVD player /

External decoder

SUB-

WOOFER

FRONT

AUDIO

CENTER SURROUND

L R L R

SURROUND

BACK

L R

L R L R L R

Nail, tack, etc.

Standing alone

Use the procedure shown above to assemble.

Bluetooth device

(A2DP Compatibility)

L R L R L R

NOTE

• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.

• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.

• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

• If the signal has noise interference, connect the ground terminal

(GND) to reduce noise.

• If you are unable to receive a good broadcast signal, we recommend installing an outdoor antenna. For details, inquire at the retail store where you purchased the unit.

Remote control unit

You can enjoy listening to music by connecting a wireless receiver via the M-XPort input connector. In this case, set the input source to

“M-XPort”.

NOTE

To use wireless receiver RX101 as external IR receiver, set the remote sensor function of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage 89

“Remote control settings”).

in Set as Necessary

To play analog signals input from 7.1CH INPUT terminals, set

“Input Mode” (vpage 71) to “7.1CH IN”.

“7.1CH IN” can also be selected with A/D on the remote control unit.

When a device is connected to the SBL/SBR terminal of 7.1CH INPUT terminals, set “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) to “Normal”.

23

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 23 2010/08/23 18:32:32

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Connecting to a home network (LAN)

• This unit lets you play via your home network (LAN) music files stored on a computer and music content such as that from Internet radio.

You can also operate this unit from a computer using the Web control function.

• You can update by downloading the latest firmware from the

Marantz website.

For more information, on the menu, select “Firmware Update”

(vpage 86).

• See “Network Setup” on the menu (vpage 81) for more information on network setting.

Cables used for connections

Cable (sold separately)

Ethernet cable

Internet

Modem

Computer

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Required system

n

Broadband internet connection

n

Modem

Device that connects to the broadband circuit and conducts communications on the Internet.

A type that is integrated with a router is also available.

n

Router

When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions:

• Built-in DHCP server

This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN.

• Built-in 100BASE-TX switch

When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.

n

Ethernet cable (CAT-5 or greater recommended)

• Use only shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable which is available at retailer.

• Some flat type Ethernet cables are easily affected by noise.

We recommend using a normal type cable.

NOTE

• A contract with an ISP is required to connect to the Internet.

No additional contract is needed if you already have a broadband connection to the Internet.

• The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact an

ISP or a computer shop for details.

• Marantz assumes no responsibility whatsoever for any communication errors or troubles resulting from customer’s network environment or connected devices.

• This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE-compatible router is required if you have a contract for a type of line set by PPPoE.

• Do not connect an NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port/

Ethernet connector on your computer.

Router

To WAN side

To LAN port

To LAN port

LAN port/

Ethernet connector

• If you have an Internet provider contract for a line on which network settings are made manually, make the settings at “Network Setup”

(vpage 81).

• With this unit, it is possible to use the DHCP and Auto IP functions to make the network settings automatically.

• When using this unit with the broadband router’s DHCP function enabled, this unit automatically performs the IP address setting and other settings.

When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, make the settings for the IP address, etc., at “Network

Setup” (vpage 81).

• When setting manually, check the setting contents with the network administrator.

For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet

Service Provider) or a computer shop.

24

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 24 2010/08/23 18:32:33

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Playback (Basic operation)

n Selecting the input source (vpage 25) n Adjusting the master volume (vpage 26) n Turning off the sound temporarily (vpage 26) n Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player

(vpage 26) n Playing a CD player (vpage 26) n Playing an iPod® (vpage 27) n Playing a USB memory device (vpage 28) n Tuning in radio stations (vpage 30) n Playing a network audio (vpage 34)

Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)

(vpage 44)

Playback (Advanced operation) (vpage 55)

Important information

Before starting playback, make the connections between the different components and the settings on this unit.

NOTE

Also refer to the operating instructions of the connected components when playing them.

Selecting the input source

(

Press the input source select button

BD , DVD , VCR , SAT , GAME , AUX1 ,

NET/USB , TV , CD , CDR , SATR , TUNE ,

M-XP ) twice to play back that source.

The desired input source can be selected directly.

• Select input source “PHONO” to play back music from a record player connected to the PHONO input connector.

• Select the input source “PHONO” using one of the following methods.

q “Source select ” menu (“Using the “Source Select” menu” provided on the right) w INPUT df on the remote control unit (“Operating the remote control unit” provided on the right) e INPUT SELECTOR knob on the main unit (“Operating the main unit” provided on the right)

• Select input source “SIRIUS” with SATR button.

• When using with an iPod connected directly to the USB port of this unit, select “ (NET/USB)” for the input source.

• Input sources that are not going to be used can be set ahead of time.

Make this setting at “Source Delete” (vpage 84).

• To turn off the source selection menu without selecting an input source, press SOURCE SEL again.

n

Using the button on the remote control unit

Press INPUT df .

• When INPUT df is pressed, the input source is switched in the order shown below.

n

Using the “Source Select” menu

q Press AMP and the press SOURCE SEL .

Display the “Source Select” menu.

q Source Select :Flickr

Recent Source

The currently selected input source is highlighted.

w

Select

ENTER Enter n

BD

M-XPort

DVD VCR

HD Radio

SAT

SIRIUS

GAME

PHONO

Using the knob on the main unit

Turn INPUT SELECTOR .

• Turning INPUT SELECTOR switches the input source, as shown below.

AUX1

CDR

NET/USB

CD TV e q Input Source

The name of the highlighted input source is displayed.

w Recently used sources

The recently used input sources (up to fi ve) are displayed.

e Icons for the input sources in the different categories are displayed.

w Use uio p to select the input source, then press ENTER .

The input source is set and the source selection menu is turned off.

BD

M-XPort

DVD VCR

HD Radio

SAT

SIRIUS

GAME

PHONO

AUX1

CDR

NET/USB

CD TV

You can also use the following operation to select an input source.

25

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 25 2010/08/23 18:32:34

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Important information

Adjusting the master volume

Use VOLUME to adjust the volume. n When the “Volume Display” setting

(vpage 84) is “Relative”

G Adjustable rangeH

– – – –80.5dB – 18.0dB n When the “Volume Display” setting (vpage 84) is

“Absolute”

G Adjustable rangeH 0.0 – 99.0

• The adjustable range may vary depending on input signal and channel level settings.

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

Set the front speakers to be used

Press SPKR A/B .

• Each time you press SPKR A/B , the front speaker setting will change as follows.

Front A Front B Front A+B

You can also operate via the main unit.

In this case, perform the following operations.

Turn VOLUME to adjust the volume.

SVENSKA

Playing a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player

The following describes the procedure for playing Blu-ray Disc player/

DVD player.

1 Prepare for playback.

q Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player.

w Change the TV input to the input of this unit.

e Load the disc in the player.

2 Press unit.

ON to turn on power to the

3 Press BD or DVD twice to switch the input source for the player used for playback.

4 Play the component connected to this unit.

Make the necessary settings on the player (language setting, subtitles setting, etc.) beforehand.

Turning off the sound temporarily

Press MUTE .

• The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage 84).

• To cancel, press MUTE again. Muting can also be canceled by adjusting the master volume.

Playing a CD player

The following describes the procedure for playing CD player.

1 Prepare for playback.

q Turn on the power of the subwoofer and player.

w Load the disc in the player.

2 Press unit.

ON to turn on power to the

3 Press CD twice to switch the input source to the CD player.

4 Play the component connected to this unit.

26

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 26 2010/08/23 18:32:35

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Playing an iPod®

You can play back both video, photo and audio.

1 Connect the iPod® to the USB

port (vpage 20 “Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port”).

2 Press unit.

ON to turn on power to the

3 Press NET/USB twice to switch the input source to “NET/USB”.

Favorite

Internet Radio

Media Server iPod

Flickr

Napster

Pandora

[1/8]

4 Use ui to select “iPod”, then press ENTER or p .

iPod

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Podcasts

Genres

Composers

[1/8]

SEARCH

Search

NOTE

If the connections screen is not displayed, the iPod may not be properly connected. Reconnect it.

5 Press SEARCH/INFO and hold it down for 2 seconds or more to select the display mode.

• There are two modes for displaying the contents recorded on the iPod.

Remote mode Display iPod information on the TV screen.

• The unit display shows single-byte alphanumeric characters and some symbols only. “.” is displayed in place of incompatible characters.

• In ”Remote mode”, the iPod display is as shown at right.

OK to disconnect.

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.

• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).

The default setting is “OFF”.

• In Remote mode, press STATUS during playback to check the title name, artist name, and album name.

NOTE

• Depending on the type of iPod and the software version, some functions may not operate.

• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on an iPod when using this unit in conjunction with the iPod.

Direct mode Display iPod information on the iPod screen.

• “Direct iPod” is displayed on the display of this unit.

Display mode

Playable fi les

Active buttons

Music fi le

Video fi le

Remote control unit

(This unit) iPod®

Remote mode

P

P

Direct mode

P z

P

P z Only the sound is played.

6 Use ui to select the item, then press to select the fi le to be played.

ENTER or p

7 Press ENTER

Playback starts.

, p or 1 .

27

2010/08/23 18:32:36 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 27

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Playing an iPod® n

iPod operation

Operation buttons uio p

Function

Cursor operation /

Auto search (cue, ui) /

Manual search (Press and hold, ui)

ENTER

(Press and release)

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

(Press and release)

SEARCH

(Press and hold)

RETURN

6 7

(Press and hold)

1

8 9

3

2

REPEAT

RANDOM

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Enter / Pause

Stop

Page search z 1 / Character search z 2

Remote / Direct mode switching

Return

Manual search

(fast-reverse/fast-forward)

Playback / Pause

Auto search (cue)

Pause

Stop

Repeat playback

Random playback

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.

z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.

• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Playing a USB memory device

Playing back music or still picture (JPEG) files recorded on a USB memory device.

Important information

n

USB memory devices

A USB memory device can be connected to the USB port of this unit to play music and still picture (JPEG) files stored on the USB memory device.

Also, files stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is connected directly to the USB port of this unit. See “Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port” (vpage 20).

• Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class and

MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) standards can be played on this unit.

• This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in “FAT16” or

“FAT32” format.

Album art function

When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.

Slide show function

Still picture (JPEG) files stored on USB memory devices can be played as slide shows.

The duration each picture is displayed can be set.

This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder.

G Compatible formatsH

USB memory devices z 1

WMA (Windows Media Audio) P z 2

MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3)

WAV

P

P

P z 3 MPEG-4 AAC

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)

JPEG

P

P z 1 USB

• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.

• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using

MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.

• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.

• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.

• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.

z 2 Copyright-protected files can be played on certain portable players compatible with MTP.

z 3 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.

G Compatible formatsH

Sampling frequency

Bit rate Extension

WMA (Windows

Media Audio)

MP3 (MPEG-1

Audio Layer-3)

WAV

32/44.1/48 kHz

32/44.1/48 kHz

32/44.1/48 kHz

48 – 192 kbps

32 – 320 kbps

.wma

.mp3

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps

.wav

.aac/

.m4a/

.mp4

FLAC (Free

Lossless Audio

Codec)

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96 kHz

– .flac

• Repeat playback and shuffle playback can also be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”

(vpage 71) in the menu.

• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.

28

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 28 2010/08/23 18:32:36

Playing fi les stored on USB memory devices

1

2

Connect the USB memory device

to the USB port (vpage 20

“Connecting an iPod or USB memory device to the USB port”).

Press NET/USB favorite

Internet Radio

Media Server

USB

Flickr

Napster

Pandora

D&M1

D&M2

D&M3

Music1.mp4

Music2.mp3

Music3.m4a

Music4.m4a

twice to switch the input source to “NET/USB”.

[1/8]

3 Press ui to select “USB”, then press ENTER or p .

USB [1/7]

• Selecting in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select

“USB”.

4 Press ui to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or p .

5 Press ui to select the fi le, then press

1 .

Playback starts.

ENTER , p or

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.

• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).

The default setting is “OFF”.

• If the USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions, only the top partition can be selected.

• This unit is compatible with MP3 fi les conforming to “MPEG-1 Audio

Layer-3” standards.

NOTE

• Note that Marantz will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.

• USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub.

• Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or be supplied power. When using a USB portable hard disk that can draw power from an AC adapter, we recommend using the

AC adapter.

• It is not possible to connect and use a computer via the USB port of this unit using a USB cable.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Playing a USB memory device n

USB operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation /

Auto search (cue, ui)

ENTER

(Press and release)

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

1

8 9

3

2

1 – 8

SHIFT

REPEAT

RANDOM

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Enter / Pause

Stop

Page search z 1 / Character search z 2

Return

Playback / Pause

Auto search (cue)

Pause

Stop

Preset channel selection

Preset channel block selection

Repeat playback

Random playback

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.

z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the fi rst letter you want to search mode.

• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .

• Repeat playback and shuffl e playback can also be set from “Input Setup” – “Playback Mode”

(vpage 71) in the menu.

• If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.

29

2010/08/23 18:32:36 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 29

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Tuning in radio stations

Important information

n

About SIRIUS XM radio

To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except

Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.

Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz,

Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.

Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding

“The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time.

Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children.

To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers should visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR

(1-877-438- 9677).

To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. and Canadian customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US) or siriuscanada.ca (Canada).

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n

SIRIUS XM radio legal

SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius

XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and

XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or

XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and

Hawaii.

n

Using the HD Radio™ receiver

HD Radio stations offer higher sound quality than conventional

FM/ AM broadcasts. It is also possible to receive data services and select broadcasts from among up to eight multicast programs.

HD Radio Technology provides higher quality sound than conventional broadcasts and allows reception of data services.

• FM sounds as sensational as CDs

• AM sounds as rich as analog FM stereo

• A variety of “data services”, including text-based information, song title, artist name, album name, genre, etc. can be received.

Furthermore, in addition to conventional broadcasts, with

HD Radio broadcasting it is possible to choose from up to 8 multicast programs.

For detailed information on HD Radio Technology, please go to

“www. hdradio.com”.

Listening to SIRIUS satellite radio

1 Press SATR twice to switch the input source to “SIRIUS”.

2 Use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the channel.

When the channel is tuned in, the name of the song and artist are displayed.

• The channel switches continuously when TUNING + or TUNING – is pressed and held.

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.

• The song title, artist name, composer name, category and reception level can be checked by pressing STATUS .

30

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 30 2010/08/23 18:32:37

n

Checking the SIRIUS signal strength and radio

ID

1 Press STATUS until

“SIGNAL” appears on the display.

The display will switch as shown below, depending on the reception conditions.

Display Status

EXCELLENT Signal strength is excellent

GOOD

WEAK

NO SIGNAL

Signal strength is good

Signal strength is weak

No signal

2 Adjust the position of the antenna until “SIGNAL:

EXCELLENT” is shown on the display.

3 Press STATUS is displayed.

until the channel (example: “SR001”)

4 Press TUNING + or TUNING – and select channel 0 (SR000).

Channel No. and Sirius ID are alternately shown on the display.

SR000 SiriusID

************

Sirius ID

• Write your own SIRIUS ID for storage use.

Sirius ID :

The strength of both the SIRIUS satellite and terrestrial signals can be checked “Antenna Aiming” (vpage 68).

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Tuning in radio stations n

Presetting radio channels (Preset memory)

Your favorite broadcast channels can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 channels can be preset.

1 Tune in the broadcast channel you want to preset.

2 Press MEMORY .

3 Press SHIFT to select the block

(A to G) in which to preset the channel (1 to 8 per block), then press PRESET + , PRESET – or

8 to select the preset number.

1 –

4 Press MEMORY the setting.

again to complete

• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to

4.

You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations.

Press o p to select the preset radio channel.

n

Searching categories

1 Press o p .

SR001 Hits 1

CAT : Pops

Channel category

2 Use o p to select the category, to use the desired channel.

ui to select

NOTE

Preset channels are erased by overwriting them.

n

Listening to preset channels

Press PRESET + , PRESET – to select the desired preset channel, then press

ENTER .

• Preset channels can also be selected by pressing SHIFT/TOP MENU

8 (Channel).

(Block) and 1 – n

Accessing SIRIUS satellite radio channels directly

1 Press SEARCH/INFO .

2 Press 0 – 9 to input the channel.

Example: Accessing channel “SR123”:

Press 1 , 2 and 3 .

• If no button is pressed within several seconds, the channel automatically switches to the one whose number has been input.

3 Press ENTER to set that channel.

Reception switches to the selected channel.

• “UPDATING” is displayed while the encording code is being updated.

• “SIRIUS UPDATING” is displayed when updating SIRIUS tuner firmware.

• Refer to “Troubleshooting” – “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (vpage 113) regarding other messages.

31

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 31 2010/08/23 18:32:37

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n

Tuning in radio stations

1

3

Parental Lock

Tune to the channel you want to lock.

2 Press ENTER for at least 3 seconds.

“Enter Lock Code” is displayed.

Enter the 4-digit lock code using uio p or 0 – 9 .

When you enter the correct code, the corresponding channel is locked.

4 Press ENTER .

• Channels under Parental Lock cannot be tuned in by performing channel up/down or by category search.

• Channels stored in preset memory can be tuned in by the preset channel select operation, even if Parental Lock is applied.

• When a channel to which Parental Lock is applied is being played,

Parental Lock for that channel is cancelled by performing step 2.

• See “Edit Lock Cord” (vpage  68) for the method of changing

Parental Lock Cord.

• You can also set “Parental Lock” (vpage 67) from the menu.

n

SIRIUS operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

TUNING +, –

0 – 9

SHIFT

MEMORY

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation / Category search

To parental lock password check screen

Direct search

Return

Channel selection

Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /

Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)

Preset channel block selection

Preset memory registration

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz)

Listening to HD Radio stations

1

2

Press TUNE twice to switch the input source to “HD Radio”.

Press

“AM”.

BAND to select “FM” or

FM When listening to an FM broadcast.

AM When listening to an AM broadcast.

3 Tune in the desired broadcast station.

q To tune in automatically (Auto tuning)

Press T.MODE

to light the “HD-AUTO” or “AUTO” indicator on the display, then use TUNING + or TUNING – to select the station you want to hear.

• The indicator lights on the display when an HD Radio station is tuned in.

• When “HD-AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, only HD Radio stations are tuned in.

• If “AUTO” (tuning mode) is selected, both HD Radio and analog stations are tuned in.

w To tune in manually (Manual tuning)

Press use

T.MODE

to turn off the display’s “AUTO” indicator, then

TUNING + or TUNING – to select the station you want to hear.

• If the desired station cannot be tuned in with auto tuning, tune it in manually.

• When tuning in stations manually, press and hold

TUNING – to change frequencies continuously.

TUNING + or

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “TUNER” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.

32

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 32 2010/08/23 18:32:38

n

Selecting audio programs

HD Radio Technology enables stations to broadcast multiple Audio

Program and data services on HD2 / HD3 / HD4 channels.

Press ui program.

to select the audio

If the station you are listening to has multiple audio programs, “HD1” is indicated on the display. If it only has one audio program,

“HD” is indicated.

n

Presetting radio stations (Manual preset)

Your favorite broadcast stations can be preset so that you can tune them in easily. Up to 56 stations can be preset.

Stations can be preset automatically at “Auto Preset” (vpage 67).

If “Auto Preset” is performed after performing “Manual Preset”, the

“Manual Preset” settings will be overwritten.

1 Tune in the broadcast station you want to preset.

2 Press MEMORY .

3 Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select the block (A to G) in which to preset the channel (1 to 8 per block), then press preset number.

PRESET + ,

PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select the

4 Press MEMORY the setting.

again to complete

• To preset other stations, repeat steps 1 to

4.

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL

Default settings

Block (A – G) and

Channel (1 – 8)

A1 – A8

B1 – B8

C1 – C8

D1 – D8

E1 – E8

F1 – F8

G1 – G8

Default Settings

87.5 / 87.9 / 89.1 / 93.3 / 97.9 / 98.1 / 98.9 /

100.1 MHz

101.9 / 102.7 / 107.9 / 90.1 / 90.1 / 90.1 /

90.1 / 90.1 MHz

530 / 600 / 930 / 1000 / 1120 / 1210 / 1400 /

1710 kHz

90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Tuning in radio stations n

Direct frequency tuning

You can enter the receiving frequency directly to tune in.

1 Press SEARCH/INFO .

2 Input frequencies using the 0 – 9.

• If o is pressed, the immediately preceding input is cancelled.

3 When setting is completed, press

ENTER .

The preset frequency is tuned in.

Specify a name for the preset broadcast station

(Preset Name) (vpage 68)

Listening to preset stations

1 Press SHIFT/TOP MENU to select the memory block (A to G).

2 Press PRESET + , PRESET – or

1 – 8 to select the desired preset channel.

You can also operate via the main unit. In this case, perform the following operations.

Press o p to select the preset radio station.

n

Check the HD Radio reception information

Press STATUS while an HD Radio broadcast is being received.

The current reception information is shown on the display.

q Normal w Frequency / Signal strength e Station name / Program and Program type r Title name / Artist name t Album name / Genre name

NOTE

If the station signal weakens while receiving a digital broadcast (while

and text is displayed), the mode automatically switches to the analog reception mode (the reception frequency is displayed).

Because of this, the indicator and text may flicker if the station signal level is weak and unstable.

33

2010/08/23 18:32:38 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 33

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Tuning in radio stations n

Tuner (HD Radio reception) operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

ENTER

SEARCH

RETURN

BAND

T.MODE

TUNING +, –

0 – 9

SHIFT

MEMORY

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation /

Multicast switching (ui)

Enter

Direct frequency tuning

Return

FM/AM switching

Switch search modes

Tuning (up/down)

Preset channel selection (1 – 8) /

Direct frequency tuning (0 – 9)

Preset channel block selection

Preset memory registration

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz)

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Playing a network audio

Follow this procedure to play Internet radio stations or music or still picture (JPEG) files stored on a computer .

Important information

n

About the internet radio function

• Internet radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the

Internet.

Internet radio stations from around the world can be received.

• This unit is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:

• Stations can be selected by genre and region.

• Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.

• Internet radio stations in MP3 and WMA (Windows Media

Audio) format can be listened to.

• Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing an exclusive Marantz Internet radio URL from a Web browser on a computer.

• The function is managed for individual users, so you must provide your MAC or e-mail address.

Exclusive URL: http://www.radiomarantz.com

• The radio station database service may be suspended without notice.

• This unit’s Internet radio station list is created using a radio station database service (vTuner). This database service provides a list edited and created for this unit.

n

Media player

This function lets you play music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) stored on a computer (media server) connected to this unit via a network.

With this unit’s network audio playback function, connection to the server is possible using one of the technologies below.

• Windows Media Player Network Sharing Service

• Windows Media DRM10

Album art function

When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.

Slide show function

Still picture (JPEG) files stored in folders on a media server can be played as slide shows. The duration each picture is displayed can be set.

This unit plays back image (JPEG) files in the orientation in which they are stored in the folder.

G Compatible formatsH

Internet radio Media server z 1

WMA (Windows

Media Audio)

MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio

Layer-3)

WAV

MPEG-4 AAC

FLAC (Free Lossless

Audio Codec)

JPEG

P

P

P

P

P

P

P z 2

P

A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.

z 1 Media server

• This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard.

• This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using

MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4.

• This unit is compatible with WMA META tags.

• WAV format Quantization bit rate: 16 bits.

• FLAC format Quantization bit rate: 16/24 bits.

z 2 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.

For music files in WMA (Windows Media Audio) format, the album art is only played when using Windows Media Player ver. 11.

34

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 34 2010/08/23 18:32:39

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Playing a network audio

WMA (Windows

Media Audio)

MP3 (MPEG-1

Audio Layer-3)

WAV

MPEG-4 AAC

FLAC (Free

Lossless Audio

Codec)

G Compatible formatsH

Sampling frequency

Bit rate

32/44.1/48 kHz 48 – 192 kbps

32/44.1/48 kHz 32 – 320 kbps

32/44.1/48 kHz –

32/44.1/48 kHz 16 – 320 kbps

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96 kHz

Extension

.wma

.mp3

.wav

.aac/

.m4a/

.mp4

.fl ac n

About Flickr

Flickr is an online photograph sharing service that started in 2004.

You can use the this unit to view photographs that have been made public by Flickr users. You do not need an account to use Flickr.

To view photographs that you recorded yourself, you need an account in order to upload these photographs to the Flickr server.

For details, see the Flickr homepage.

http://www.fl ickr.com/

Listening to internet radio

1 Prepare for playback.

q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power

(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).

w If settings are required, make the

“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).

2 Press NET/USB twice to switch the input source to “NET/USB”.

3 Press ui to select “Internet

Radio”, then press ENTER or p .

• Selecting in the “Source Select” menu, lets you directly select

“Internet Radio”.

4 Press press ui to select the item you want to play, then

ENTER or p .

5 Repeat step 4 until the station list is displayed.

The station list is displayed.

6 Press ui to select the station, then press p .

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

ENTER or n

About Napster

Napster is a monthly subscription music distribution service provided by Napster LLC. This service allows users to download and play pieces of music they want to hear on this unit. Before you can use Napster, you will need to visit the Napster website on your PC to create an account and register as a member. For details, access the following site: http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html

n

About Pandora

Pandora is an automated music recommendation and Internet radio service created by the Music Genome Project.

When you fi rst listen to Pandora, it is necessary to subscribe to a

Pandora account at the Pandora homepage by your PC and register this machine. See the Pandora homepage for details.

http://www.pandora.com/marantz n

About Rhapsody

Rhapsody is a paid music broadcast service of RealNetworks.

When you fi rst listen to Rhapsody, it is necessary to subscribe to a Rhapsody account at the Rhapsody homepage by your PC and register this machine. See the Rhapsody homepage for details.

http://www.rhapsody.com/marantz

• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet, and the quality of the programs they broadcast as well as the bit rate of the tracks varies widely.

Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but depending on the communication lines and server traffi c, the music or audio signals being streamed may be interrupted. Inversely, lower bit rates mean a lower sound quality but less tendency for the sound to be interrupted.

• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is busy or not broadcasting.

• On this unit, folder and fi le names can be displayed as titles. Any characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with “.” (period).

• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).

The default setting is “OFF”.

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vvpage 85. Press uio p to return to the original screen.

• When STATUS is pressed, the display can be switched between the title name and radio station name.

n

Recently played internet radio stations

Recently played internet radio stations can be selected from

“Recently Played”.

Up to 20 stations stored in “Recently Played”.

1 Press ui to select “Recently

Played”, then press ENTER or p .

2 Press ui to select the item you want to play, then press ENTER or p .

n

Searching stations by keyword

(Alphabetic strings)

1 Press ui to select “Search by Keyword”, then press

ENTER or p .

Search by Keyword

Enter Station

SEARCH

Input

Keyboard

INSERT

Submit

Insert

RETURN

DELETE

Cancel

Delete

• For character input, see page 65.

2 Input the characters, then press ENTER .

35

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 35 2010/08/23 18:32:39

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Playing a network audio n

Presetting internet radio stations

Preset Internet radio stations can be selected directly.

1 While the Internet radio station you want to preset is playing, press MEMORY .

2 Press ui to select “Preset”, then press ENTER .

3 Press SHIFT/TOP MENU , then press PRESET + , PRESET – or

1 – 8 to select the desired preset number.

4 Press MEMORY again to complete the setting.

The Internet radio station is now preset.

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

1 Press MEMORY while the Internet radio station you want to register is playing.

2 Press ui to select “Favorites”, then press ENTER .

3 Press o to select “Add”.

The Internet radio station is registered.

• If you do not want to register the station, press p .

SVENSKA n

Registering internet radio stations as your favorites

Favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so when a station is registered as a favorite it can be tuned in easily.

NOTE

If registered at a number that has already been preset, the previously registered setting is cleared.

n

Listening to preset internet radio stations

After pressing SHIFT/TOP MENU , press

PRESET + , PRESET – or 1 – 8 to select the registered preset number.

This unit automatically connects to the

Internet and playback begins.

n

Listening to internet radio stations registered in your favorites

1 Press AMP and then press

SOURCE SEL to display the

Source Select menu, then select

(vpage 25).

2 Press NET/USB and then press ui to select the Internet radio station, then press ENTER or p .

This unit automatically connects to the

Internet and playback begins.

3 Press o to select “Remove”.

The selected Internet radio station is cleared.

• To cancel the operation without clearing the station, press p .

n

Internet radio operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

ENTER

(Press and release)

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

2

1 – 8

SHIFT

MEMORY

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation

Enter

Stop

Page search z 1 / Character search z 2

Return

Stop

Preset channel selection

Preset channel block selection

Favorites / Preset memory registration

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.

z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the fi rst letter you want to search mode.

• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .

n

Clearing internet radio stations from your favorites

1 Press AMP and then press

SOURCE SEL to display the

Source Select menu, then select

(vpage 25).

2 Press NET/USB and then press ui to select the Internet radio station you want to clear, then press MEMORY .

If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.

36

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 36 2010/08/23 18:32:40

Playing files stored on a computer

Use this procedure to play music files, image files or playlists.

1 Prepare for playback.

q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power

(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).

w If settings are required, make the

“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).

e Prepare the computer

(vComputer’s operating instructions).

2 Press AMP and then press

SOURCE SEL to display the

Source Select menu, then select

(vpage 25).

3 Press NET/USB and then use ui to select the server including the file to be played, then press p .

ENTER or

4 Use ui to select the search item or folder, then press ENTER or p .

5 Repeat step 4 until the file is displayed.

6 Press ui to select the file, then press ENTER

Playback starts once buffering reaches “100%”.

or p .

SVENSKA

• Connections to the required system and specific settings must be made in order to play music files (vpage 24).

• Before starting, you must launch the computer’s server software and set the files as server contents. For details, see the operating instructions of your server software.

• Depending on the size of the still picture (JPEG) file, some time may be required for the file to be displayed.

• The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/ files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

• WMA Lossless files can be played when using a server supporting transcoding, such as Windows Media Player Ver. 11.

NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).

The default setting is “OFF”.

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.

• Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name.

n

Playing files that have been preset or registered in your favorites

Files can be preset, registered in your favorites and played using the same operations as for Internet radio stations (vpage 36).

NOTE

• Presettings are erased by overwriting them.

• When the operations described below is performed, the media server’s database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play preset or favorite music files.

• When you quit the media server and then restart it.

• When music files are deleted or added on the media server.

• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server name.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Playing a network audio n

Media server operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation /

Auto search (cue, ui)

ENTER

(Press and release)

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

1

8 9

3

2

1 – 8

SHIFT

Enter / Pause

Stop

Page search z 1 / Character search z 2

Return

Playback / Pause

Auto search (cue)

Pause

Stop

Preset channel selection

Preset channel block selection

MEMORY

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Favorites / Preset memory registration

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz)

Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)

Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO twice.

z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o p to select the first letter you want to search mode.

• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .

If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.

37

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 37 2010/08/23 18:32:40

ENGLISH DEUTSCH n

Viewing photographs shared by particular users

1

2

Prepare for playback.

q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power

(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).

w If settings are required, make the

“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).

Press AMP and then press

SOURCE SEL to display the

Source Select menu, then select

(vpage 25).

FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Playing a network audio

Viewing photographs on the Flickr site

You can view photographs shared by particular users, or all of the photographs shared on Flickr.

6 Press or p .

ui

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

to select the folder, and then press

SVENSKA

Favorites Displays the favorite photographs of the specifi ed user.

Photostream Displays a list of shared photographs.

ENTER

PhotoSets Displays the folder (photograph album) list.

Contacts Displays a Username registered for Flickr Contact by a particular user.

Remove this

Contact

Deletes a user from Flickr Contact.

7 Press ui to select the fi le, and then press or p .

The selected fi le is displayed.

ENTER

3

4

Flickr

Press

Add Flickr Contact

All Content

NET/USB

[1/2]

and then use

Flickr Contact”, then press ENTER or p .

Enter “Username”.

• For character input, see page 65.

ui to select “Add

5 After inputting the “Username”, then press

The “Username” entered in step 4 is displayed.

ENTER .

• If the Username you typed in cannot be found, “The Flickr Contact you entered could not be found” appears. Check and type in the correct Username.

n

Viewing all photographs on Flickr

1 Prepare for playback.

q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power

(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).

w If settings are required, make the

“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).

2 Press AMP and then press

SOURCE SEL to display the

Source Select menu, then select

(vpage 25).

Flickr

Add Flickr Contact

All Content

[1/2]

3 Press NET/USB and then use ui

Content”, then press ENTER or p .

to select “All

4 Press or p .

ui to select the folder, and then press ENTER

Interestingness Displays photographs that are popular from the number of user comments or number of times they are added as favorites.

Recent Displays the most recently added photographs.

Search by text Search for photographs by keyword.

5 Press ui to select the fi le, and then press or p .

The selected fi le is displayed.

ENTER

NOTE

Depending on the fi le format, some photographs cannot be viewed. n

Flickr operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation /

Auto search (cue, ui)

ENTER

(Press and release)

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

2

1 – 8

SHIFT

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Enter

Stop

Page Search z

Return

Stop

Preset channel selection

Preset channel block selection

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz) z When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO , then press o (previous page) or p

(next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .

38

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 38 2010/08/23 18:32:41

Listening to Napster

1 Prepare for playback.

q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power

(vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).

w If settings are required, make the

“Network Connecting” (vpage 81).

2 Press AMP and then press

SOURCE SEL to display the

Source Select menu, then select

(vpage 25).

3 Press NET/USB and then use

“Username” and “Password”.

ui p to input

Napster Account

Username

Password

OK

Enter Username

RETURN

Cancel

• For character input, see page 65.

4 After inputting the “Username” and “Password”, select “OK”, then press ENTER .

If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for

Napster is displayed.

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL n

Searching from Napster menu

1 Use ui to select search item or folder, then press ENTER or p .

2 Repeat step 1 until the track is displayed.

3 Use ui or p .

to select the track item, then press ENTER

ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Playing a network audio n

Registering tracks in my Napster library

1 Press p while the track you wish to register is playing.

2 Select “Add to my library”, then press ENTER or p .

The track is entered in the Library.

n

Entering a character search for the track you want to listen to

1 Press SEARCH/INFO .

Napster

My Napster Library

Top 100s

Search by Artist

New Releases

Radio Search by Albums

Napster Playlists

E

Search by Track

Staff Picks

• You can search by artist name, album name or track name.

2 Use ui to select the search item, then press

The search display appears.

ENTER .

Search by Artist

[1/8]

Listening to tracks registered in my Napster library

1 Use ui to select “My Napster

Library”, then press p .

ENTER or

2 Use ui to select the information or track, then press ENTER .

• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).

The default setting is “OFF”.

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.

• Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name.

Enter Artist Name NOTE

• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.

• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER .

SEARCH

Input

Keyboard

INSERT

Submit

Insert

RETURN

DELETE

Cancel

Delete

• For character input, see page 65.

3 Input the characters, then press ENTER .

39

2010/08/23 18:32:41 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 39

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Playing a network audio n

Napster operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation /

Auto search (cue, ui)

ENTER

(Press and release)

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

1

8 9

2

1 – 8

SHIFT

Enter / Pause

Stop

Search menu / Page search z

Return

Playback / Pause

Auto search (cue)

Stop

Preset channel selection

Preset channel block selection

TV POWER

TV INPUT

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz)

Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)

Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”) z When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH/INFO twice, then press o (previous page) or p (next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH/INFO .

Listening to Pandora

1

2

Prepare for playback.

q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).

w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”

(vpage 81).

Press AMP

ESPAÑOL

and then press

NEDERLANDS

SOURCE SEL to display the

Source Select menu, then select

(vpage 25).

Then press NET/USB .

Pandora

I have a Pandora account

I am new to Pandora

Enter

RETURN

Cancel

Pandora

I have a Pandora account

I am new to Pandora

Please got to http://www.pandora.com/marantz and follow the instructions there to create a new account.

Your aactivation code is

4DA2C67B

Continue

RETURN

Cancel

SVENSKA

• If you do not have a Pandora account, press i to select “I am new to Pandora”. The URL of Pandora and activation code are displayed. Access the Pandora web page from your PC and register the displayed activation code and account information. Then press

ENTER .

3

4

If you have a Pandora account, press ui to select

“I have a Pandora account”, then press ENTER or p .

Pandora Account

Email address

Password

OK

Enter Email address

RETURN

Cancel

Input “Email address” and “Password”.

• For character input, see page 65.

5 After inputting the “Email address” and “Password”, select “OK”, then press ENTER .

If the “Email address” and “Password” match, the top menu for

Pandora is displayed.

NOTE

Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER .

40

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 40 2010/08/23 18:32:42

n

Creating an original radio station

You can create up to 100 original radio stations.

1 Use ui to select “New Station”, then press ENTER or p .

My Station

Exit

New Station

Quick Mix

D&M1 Radio

RETURN

Sign out

2 Input a “Track Name” or “Artist Name”, then press

ENTER .

• For character input, see page 65.

3 Use ui to select “Search by artist” or “Search by track”, then press ENTER .

You can search and display a list by track or artist.

4 Press ui , select a fi le (e.g. D&M2) from the list, and press ENTER or p

Selected fi le is played back.

.

“Radio” is added to the end of a fi lename, and your original radio station is created (e.g. D&M2 Radio).

My Station

Exit

[1/3]

New Station

Quick Mix

D&M1 Radio

D&M2 Radio

[1/4]

RETURN

Sign out

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL n

Listening to a created radio station

Listening to a created radio station

(e.g. D&M2 Radio)

By specifying your favorite track or artist name, music that has a similar rhythm or sound is chosen and streamed.

Press ui and select the radio station

(“D&M2 Radio”) that you want to

listen to, and press ENTER or p .

In Pandora, you can search for the track name or artist name using “D&M2” as a keyword.

When the search is complete, tracks that have a similar rhythm or sound are streamed.

ITALIANO FRANÇAIS

Menu

I like this track i don’t like this track

Why is this track playing?

Create station

Bookmark this track

I’m tired of this track

Delete this station

DEUTSCH

[1/7]

ENGLISH

Playing a network audio n

Arranging tracks within radio stations

You can sort tracks by operating the Pandora menu screen while a track is playing.

Press p while a track is playing.

The Pandora menu screen is displayed.

D&M2 Radio

00:15

100%

Pause

Song

Artist

Album

Skip

Now Playing

MP3 128kbps

Select

Menu

Listening to created radio stations at random

Use ui press

to select “Quick Mix”, then

ENTER or p .

Created radio stations are selected at random, and tracks are streamed.

I like this track • Press when you like the track that is being played.

• It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs up) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed on

I don’t like this track the next track.)

• Press when you don’t like the track that is being

Why is this track playing?

played.

• It will return to the Play Screen. And (Thumbs down) icon is displayed. (The icon is not displayed on the next track .)

• Displays the reason why Pandora selected this track.

Create station

Bookmark this track

I’m tired of this track

Delete this station

• Creates a Station for the Track or Artist being played.

• Bookmarks the track currently being played.

• You can check on a computer or iPhone etc.

• For details, see the Pandora web page.

• Press when you don’t like the track that is being played.

• The track will not be played for 1 month.

• Press when you want to delete the station that is being played.

NOTE

• You can Skip up to 6 Tracks that are being played back within 1 hour.

• You can create up to 100 New Stations (radio stations).

41

2010/08/23 18:32:43 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 41

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Playing a network audio n

Sign out

Disassociate this unit from your Pandora account.

1 While the Pandora top menu is displayed, press RETURN .

My Station [1/4]

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Exit

New Station

Quick Mix

D&M1 Radio

D&M2 Radio

RETURN

Sign out

2 When the popup menu appears, press

“Yes”.

o p to select

Listening to Rhapsody

1 Prepare for playback.

q Check the network environment, then turn on this unit’s power (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network (LAN)”).

w If settings are required, make the “Network Connecting”

(vpage 81).

2 Press AMP and then press SOURCE SEL to display the Source Select menu, then select (vpage 25).

Then press NET/USB .

3 Use ui to select “Sign in to your account”, then press or p .

ENTER

Rhapsody n

Pandora operation

Operation buttons uio p

Function

Cursor operation /

Auto search (cue, i)

ENTER

(Press and release)

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

1

9

3

2

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Enter / Pause

Stop

Page search z

Return

Playback

Auto search (cue)

Pause

Stop

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz) z When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH , then press o (previous page) or p (next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH .

4 Input Username and Password.

Rhapsody Account Sign In

Username

Password

OK

Start a 30-day trial

Sign in to your account

Enter

RETURN

Cancel

RETURN

Cancel

Enter Username

• For character input, see page 65.

5 After inputting the “Username” and “Password”, select “OK”, then press ENTER .

If the “Username” and “Password” match, the top menu for

Rhapsody is displayed.

NOTE

• The password should be no longer than 99 characters.

• Press RETURN to cancel the input. When “Cancel input?” is displayed, select “Yes”, then press ENTER .

n

Select the search mode

Rhapsody [1/4]

Rhapsody Music Guide

Search

Rhapsody Channels

My Library e r w q q

Search from Rhapsody latest information

1 Use ui to select “Rhapsody

Music Guide”, then press or p .

ENTER

2 Press ui to select the information for track selection, then press ENTER or p .

• For character input, see page 65.

3 Repeat step 2 until the track is displayed.

4 Use ui to select the track, then press ENTER or p .

w

Enter a character search for the track you want to listen to

1 Use ui press

to select “Search”, then

ENTER or p .

2 Use ui to select the search item, then press ENTER or p

The search display appears.

.

• You can search by artist name, album name, track name or keyword.

3 Enter the characters, then press ENTER .

42

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 42 2010/08/23 18:32:43

e

Search from the Rhapsody internet radio station

1 Use ui to select “Rhapsody

Channels”, then press ENTER or p .

2 Repeat step 1 until the radio station is displayed.

3 Use ui to select radio station, then press or p .

The search display appears.

ENTER r

Listening to tracks registered in my library

1 Use ui to select “My Library”, then press ENTER or p .

2 Repeat step 1 until the track is displayed.

3 Use ui to select the information or track, then press ENTER or p .

After selecting, the information is displayed n

Track menu

Press p during playback to display the track menu.

Introduction [1/6]

Jamp to artist

Jamp to album

Similar artists

Similar albums

Add to my library

Rating e q w

SVENSKA q w e

NEDERLANDS

Rating function

ESPAÑOL

Search from the similar music

Use ui then press

to select the search item,

ENTER or p .

Registering tracks in my library

Use ui to select “Add to my library”, then press ENTER

The track is entered in the library.

or p .

1 Use ui press

to select “Rating”, then

ENTER or p .

2 Use o press p to select the rating, then

ENTER .

ITALIANO

• To play back compressed audio with extended bass or treble reproduction, we recommend playback in M-DAX mode (vpage 76).

The default setting is “OFF”.

• You can specify the duration of the on-screen display to be displayed

(default: 30 sec) at menu “NET/USB” (vpage 85). Press uio p to return to the original screen.

• Use STATUS to switch between displaying the title name, artist name or album name.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Playing a network audio n

Rhapsody operation

Operation buttons

PRESET +, – uio p

Function

Preset channel selection

Cursor operation /

Auto search (cue, ui)

ENTER

(Press and release)

Enter / Pause

ENTER

(Press and hold)

SEARCH

RETURN

1

8 9

3

Stop

Page search z 1 / Character search z 2

Return

Playback / Pause

Auto search (cue)

Pause

Stop

Preset channel selection

2

1 – 8

SHIFT Preset channel block selection

TV POWER

TV INPUT

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz)

Repeat playback (vpage 71 “Repeat”)

Random playback (vpage 71 “Random”) z 1 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH , then press o (previous page) or p

(next page).

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH twice.

z 2 When the menu screen is displayed, press

SEARCH twice, then press o p to select the fi rst letter you want to search mode.

• If it is not possible to search the list, “unsorted list.” is displayed.

To cancel, press ui or SEARCH .

If the list is not in alphabetical order, you may not be able to perform a character search.

43

2010/08/23 18:32:45 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 43

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)

This unit can play input audio signals in multi-channel surround mode or in stereo mode.

Select a listening mode suitable for the playback contents (cinema, music, etc.) or according to your liking.

Listening mode

Input audio signal

Playback Listening mode

2-channel

Multi channel

Surround

Multi-channel

playback (vpage 44)

For 2-channel signal input:

• Surround-channel signals are created and played with surround playback.

For multichannel signal input:

• The surround signal recorded in source is played as surround playback.

(The sound is played according to the settings of the speaker size in

“Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).)

• Surround-back-channel or front-height-channel signals that are not recorded in source can be created.

2-channel

Multi channel

Stereo

Stereo playback

(vpage 46)

• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played.

• Subwoofer signals are also output.

2-channel

Multi channel

Stereo

Surround

Direct playback

(vpage 46)

Sound recorded in source is played as is.

• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.

• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.

• Tone (vpage 73)

• Dynamic EQ® (vpage 74)

• M-DAX (vpage 76)

• MultEQ® XT (vpage 74)

• Dynamic Volume® (vpage 75)

2-channel

Multi channel

Virtual

Surround

Dolby Virtual Speaker/

Dolby Headphone

playback (vpage 46)

Virtual Surround processing is performed on 2-channel or multichannel input signals that are played back.

• Some listening modes cannot be selected, depending on the audio format or number of channels of the input signal.

For details, see “Types of input signals, and corresponding surround modes” (vpage 106).

• Adjust the sound field effect with the menu “Surround Parameter” (vpage 73) to enjoy your favorite sound mode.

• You can select the listening mode by pressing SURROUND MODE on the main unit.

Press SURROUND MODE and the modes are switched as shown below.

AUTO*(STEREO)

DOLBY VS

STEREO

NEURAL

DOLBY PLgz DOLBY PLg(x) Movie

MULTI CH STEREO z For “AUTO”, press AUTO on the amplifier or remote control unit.

DOLBY PLg(x) Music

DTS NEO:6 music

DOLBY PLg(x) Game

DTS NEO:6 cinema

Multi-channel playback

n

Surround playback of 2-channel sources

1 Playing the source (vpage 26

42).

2

• If

Press SURR.

to select the surround decoder to play back multichannel sound.

SURROUND MODE on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.

• Each time SURR.

is pressed, the surround mode is switched.

Which decoder can be selected depends on the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) or “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).

DOLBY PLgz z 1 This mode is for 7.1-channel surround playback using the front height speakers.

• “PLgz Height” is displayed.

DOLBY PLgx z 2 This mode is for 7.1-channel or 6.1-channel surround playback using the surround back speakers.

• “PLgx Movie”, “PLgx Music” or “PLgx Game” is displayed.

DOLBY PLg This mode is for 5.1-channel surround playback.

Select this mode if no front height speaker nor surround back speaker is to be used.

• “PLg Movie”, “PLg Music”, “PLg Game” is displayed.

DTS NEO:6

MULTI CH

STEREO

This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or

5.1-channel surround playback using the surround back speakers.

• “DTS NEO:6 Cinema” or “DTS NEO:6 Music” is displayed.

This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers.

44

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 44 2010/08/23 18:32:45

NEURAL z 3 This mode is for 7.1-channel, 6.1-channel or

5.1-channel surround playback using the surround back speakers.

• “NEURAL” is displayed.

z 1 This can be selected when the “Amp Assign” (vpage  78) setting in the menu is set to “Normal” is set to “A”.

z 2 This can be selected when “Amp Assign” is set to “Normal” or

“Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” is not set to “None”.

z 3 This mode supports analog 2-channel audio, and linear PCM 2 channel (44.1 kHz, 48 kHz) audio.

G Views on the displayH q w n

Surround playback of multi-channel sources

(Dolby Digital, DTS etc.)

1 Playing the source (vpage 26

42).

2 Press SURR.

to select the surround decoder to play back multichannel sound.

• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.

• Select the surround mode while viewing the display on the screen (v“Displaying the currently playing surround mode” at right).

• Which decoder can be selected depends on the input signal, the settings of “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) or “Speaker Config.”

(vpage 78).

SVENSKA q Shows a decoder to be used.

w Shows Audyssey

DSX processing.

NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Displaying the currently playing surround mode

Input signal

DOLBY DIGITAL

(2ch)

NEURAL

Surround mode

NEURAL

DOLBY DIGITAL

(other than 2ch) /

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus

DOLBY TrueHD

DTS (5.1ch) /

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 /

DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 /

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD

PCM (multi ch)

All Input signal

All signals indicated above

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Movie

DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgx Music

DOLBY DIGITAL + PLgz

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + EX

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx

Movie

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgx

Music

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus + PLgz

DOLBY TrueHD

DOLBY TrueHD + EX

DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Movie

DOLBY TrueHD + PLgx Music

DOLBY TrueHD + PLgz

DTS SURROUND

DTS + PLgx Movie

DTS + PLgx Music

DTS + PLgz HEIGHT

DTS + NEO:6

DTS ES MTRX6.1

z 1

DTS ES DSCRT6.1

z 2

DTS 96/24 z 3

DTS-HD HI RES

DTS-HD MSTR

DTS-HD + NEO:6

DTS-HD + PLgx MOVIE

DTS-HD + PLgx MUSIC

DTS-HD + PLgz HEIGHT

DTS Express

MULTI CH IN

MULTI IN + Dolby EX

MULTI IN + PLgx MOVIE

MULTI IN + PLgx MUSIC

MULTI IN + PLgz HEIGHT

MULTI CH IN 7.1

Dolby VIRTUAL SPEAKER

Audyssey DSX z 4

Display

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY D + PL x MV

DOLBY D + PL x MS

DOLBY D PL z

DOLBY DIGITAL +

DOLBY D + EX

DOLBY D + PL x MV

DOLBY D + PL x MS

DOLBY D + PL z

DOLBY TrueHD

DOLBY HD EX

DOLBY HD +PL x MV

DOLBY HD +PL x MS

DOLBY HD PL z

DTS SURROUND

DTS PL x MV

DTS PL x MS

DTS PL z

DTS NEO:6

DTS ES MTRX6.1

DTS ES DSCRT6.1

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD HI RES

DTS-HD MSTR

DTS-HD NEO:6

DTS-HD PL x MV

DTS-HD PL x MS

DTS-HD PL z

DTS Express

MULTI CH IN

MULTI Dolby EX

MULTI IN PL x MV

MULTI IN PL x MS

MULTI IN PL z

MULTI CH IN 7.1

DOLBY VS

Audyssey DSX

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Multi-channel playback z 1 This is displayed when the input signal is

“DTS-ES Matrix 6.1”.

z 2 This is displayed when the input signal is

“DTS-ES Discrete 6.1”.

z 3 This is displayed when the input signal is

“DTS 96/24”.

z 4 This surround mode is displayed when

“Audyssey DSX” (vpage  75) is set to

“ON–Height–” or “ON-–Wide–”.

G Views on the displayH q w q Shows a decoder to be used.

• A DOLBY DIGITAL Plus decoder is displayed as “DOLBY D +”.

w Shows a decoder that creates sound output from the surround back speakers.

• “+ PLgz” indicates the front height sound from front height speakers.

For an input signal that can be reproduced in each surround mode, see “Surround modes and parameters” (vpage 104).

45

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 45 2010/08/23 18:32:46

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Stereo playback

This is the mode for playing in stereo. The tone can be adjusted.

• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers and subwoofer.

• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played.

1 Playing the source (vpage 26

42).

2 Press STEREO .

Stereo playback begins.

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n

Dolby Headphone mode

You can enjoy listening to multi-channel surround sound through headphones using this mode.

• To cancel, press P.DIRECT

again.

• Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the

PURE DIRECT mode.

NOTE

When in the PURE DIRECT mode, the menu screen is not displayed.

Press SURR.

to select the Dolby

Headphone mode.

• If SURROUND MODE on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.

Direct playback

Sound recorded in source is played as is.

• Surround back signals or front height signals are not created.

• In this mode, the following items cannot be adjusted.

• Tone (vpage 73) • MultEQ® XT (vpage 74)

• Dynamic EQ® (vpage 74) • Dynamic Volume® (vpage 75)

• M-DAX (vpage 76)

1 Playing the source (vpage 26

42).

2 Press P.DIRECT

direct mode.

to select the

• If PURE DIRECT on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.

Dolby Virtual Speaker/Dolby

Headphone playback

n

Dolby Virtual Speaker mode

This delivers a full surround sound experience from two stereo speakers.

• Sound is output from the front left and right speakers.

• If multichannel signals are input, they are mixed down to 2-channnel audio.

1 Playing the source (vpage 26

42).

2 Press

VS”.

SURR.

to select “DOLBY

• Each time SURR.

is pressed, the Dolby

Headphone mode is switched.

DOLBY

HEADPHONE

DOLBY HP

BYPASS

DOLBY HP

PLg Movie

DOLBY HP

PLg Music

This is the surround mode for listening with headphones.

The surround sound field is played through regular headphones.

The sound is played in the normal stereo mode rather than the surround mode when listening with headphones.

This mode is best suited for movie sources.

This mode is best suited for music sources.

• Each time P.DIRECT

is pressed, the direct mode is switched.

NOTE

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

• You can select Dolby HP PLg Movie or Dolby HP PLg Music when a

2-channel source is played back.

Source Direct This mode plays back tracks at high sound quality without passing through the sound quality adjustment circuits.

Pure Direct original sound quality.

Auto This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback.

z The following circuits that affect sound quality are set to off.

• Main unit’s display circuit (The display is turned off.)

• Analog video input/output circuit

46

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 46 2010/08/23 18:32:46

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 47

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Advanced version

Advanced version

Here, we explain functions and operations that let you make better use of this unit.

F

Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection) vpage 48

F

Playback (Advanced operation) vpage 55

F

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room) vpage 61

F

How to make detailed settings vpage 63

F

Operating the connected devices by remote control unit vpage 90

47

2010/08/23 18:32:46

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Speaker installation/connection (Advanced connection)

This section provides the installation, connection, and setup methods of speaker systems other than the 7.1-channel system (with surround back speakers).

For the speaker installation, connection, and setup methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see “Simple version (Simple setup

guide)” (vpage 4).

Use Audyssey® Auto Setup function of this unit to automatically detect the number of connected speakers and perform optimal settings for the speakers to be used.

Procedure for speaker settings

Install

Connect (vpage 49)

Set up speakers (vpage 52)

Install

This unit is compatible with Audyssey DSX™ (vpage 109) and

Dolby Pro Logic gz (vpage 110), which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation.

When using Audyssey DSX, install front wide speakers or front height speakers.

When using Dolby Pro Logic gz, install front height speakers.

Install the surround back speakers in a position 2 to 3 ft (60 to 90 cm) higher than ear level.

Surround speaker

Front height speaker

• Point slightly downwards

At least

3.3 ft / 1 m z 1

Front wide speaker z 2

45˚

2 – 3 ft /

60 – 90 cm

Front speaker

Surround back speaker

• Point slightly downwards

G Viewed from the sideH z 1 Recommended for Dolby Pro Logic gz z 2 Recommended for Audyssey DSX

NOTE

Sound is not output simultaneously from the surround back speakers, front height speakers, and front wide speakers. You can switch between speakers by changing the settings in surround mode or

Audyssey DSX.

When 7.1ch (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) installed

FHL

FWL

SL

FL

SW z3 z2 z1

SBL z 1 22˚ – 30˚ z 2 22˚ – 45˚ z 4 90˚ – 110˚ z 5 135˚ – 150˚ z 3 55˚ – 60˚

FL

SW

C

Listening position

C z

4 z

5

SBR

FR

FR

FHR

FWR

SR

When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed

z 1 z 2

SL SR

SB

Listening position z 1 22˚ – 30˚ z 2 90˚ – 110˚

48

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 48 2010/08/23 18:32:47

When 5.1ch installed

FL

SW

C z 1 z 2

SL

Listening position z 1 22˚ – 30˚ z 2 120˚

When Front A/B speakers installed

FR

SR

Install

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Connect

• For the method of connecting the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see page 5.

• For the method of connecting the TV, see page 7.

n

Example of connections to Marantz MM7055 and MM7025 power amp

7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) connection

For 7.1-channel (Surround back / Front height / Front wide speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.

G MM7025H

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

G MM7025H

G MM7025H

FL(B) FL(A)

SW

FR(A) FR(B) G MM7055H

FL Front speaker (L)

FR Front speaker (R)

C Center speaker

SW Subwoofer

SL Surround speaker (L)

SR Surround speaker (R)

SB Surround back speaker

Listening position

SBL Surround back speaker (L)

SBR Surround back speaker (R)

FHL Front height speaker (L)

FHR Front height speaker (R)

FWL Front wide speaker (L)

FWR Front wide speaker (R)

FHL

FWL

FL

SW

SL

C

FR

FHR

FWR

SR

SBL SBR

For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.

49

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 49 2010/08/23 18:32:48

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Connect

6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) connection

If you are using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the UNBALANCED or BALANCED PRE OUT

SBL terminals on the power amp.

For speaker settings in this case, see “When 6.1ch (Surround back speaker) installed” (vpage 48).

For 6.1-channel (Surround back speaker) playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

5.1-channel connection

For 5.1-channel playback, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “Normal”.

50

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 50

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

G MM7055H

FL

SW

C

FR

G MM7025H

SL SR

SB

SL

FL

SW

C

FR

For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

G MM7055H

SR

2010/08/23 18:32:52

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Front A/B connection

A second set of front speakers can be connected to the

UNBALANCED PRE OUT HL/HR terminals on the power amp.

In this case, perform the settings using the to be used”).

SPKR A/B button on the remote control or main unit (vpage 26 “Set the front speakers

2.1-channel connection

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Connect

Bi-Amp connection

A bi-amp connection is to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminals and woofer terminals of speakers compatible with the bi-amp function. This prevents the back electromotive force (returned force without output) of the woofer sent to the tweeter, which affects the sound quality of the tweeter, and you can enjoy playback with higher-quality sound.

In this case, set “Set up “Amp Assign”” (vpage 52) to “SPKR-C”.

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

G MM7025H

FR

G MM7055H

FL SW

G MM7055H

FL(B) FL(A)

SW

FR(A) FR(B) q w

FL FR q w

(L) (R) n

For connecting four subwoofers

Four subwoofers can be connected to this unit.

The same signal is output from each subwoofer terminal.

For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center speaker, surround speakers, surround back speakers

(or front wide speakers) and subwoofers, 7.1-channel playback is available.

Front speakers can be used separately, depending on the speaker’s specifications or playback source such as front speakers

(A) for multichannel playback and front speakers (B) for 2-channel playback.

When a Bi-Amp connection is used, the same signal is output from the

UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT FL/FR and SBL/SBR terminals.

For surround playback of a multichannel source, if you connect the center speaker, surround speakers and subwoofers, 5.1-channel playback is available.

NOTE

• Use speakers compatible with bi-amp connections.

• When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or wire between the speaker’s woofer and tweeter terminals.

For speaker impedance and speaker cable connections, see power amp user guide.

51

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 51 2010/08/23 18:32:56

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Set up speakers

This section provides the setup methods of speaker systems other than the 7.1-channel system

(with surround back speakers).

For the setup methods of the 7.1-channel system with surround back speakers, see “Simple

version”, “Set up speakers (Audyssey® Auto Setup)” (vpage 8) of “Simple version”.

First install and connect the speakers to this unit.

Before Auto Setup measurement, the settings shown below can be made.

• Changing the amplifier assignment (Amp Assign)

The signal output from the UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of this unit can be switched to match your speaker environment. (vpage 52 “Set up “Amp Assign””).

• Setting the channels to be used (Channel Select)

If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced (vpage 52 “Set up “Channel Select””).

n

Audio output from each PRE OUT terminal

PRE OUT Channel

UNBALANCED PRE

FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR

OUT terminal

BALANCED PRE

OUT terminal

FL/FR C SW1/SW2 SL/SR SBL/SBR

Audio Output

Surround

Back *

*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.

HL/HR WL/WR

-----

Front Height /

Front B

Front Wide

NEDERLANDS

1

Set up the remote control unit

n Set up the operation mode

Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.

2 Connect the setup microphone.

When the setup microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.

SVENSKA

3

Set up “Amp Assign”

Use ui to select “Amp Assign”, and then press ENTER .

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP1 Preparation

Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.

Set the following items if necessary.

Amp Assign

Channel Select

Auto Setup Start

MultEQ XT

[1/6]

ENTER Enter RETURN

Set use of surround back ch. for your system

Cancel

4 Use o p to select the configuration of the connected speakers, and then press RETURN .

Normal

ZONE2

Set when using surround back, front height or front wide speakers. In this case, go to step

5.

Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE2.

ZONE3

SPKR-C

Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE3.

Set for connecting the tweeter of the front speaker to the

UNBALANCED and BALANCED

PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of the power amp, and the woofer of the front speaker to the FL/FR terminals.

Press AMP

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP1 Preparation

Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.

Set the following items if necessary.

Amp Assign

Channel Select

Auto Setup Start

ENTER

Start Auto Setup

Enter

MultEQ XT

RETURN

[1/6]

Cancel

around items indicate the settings.

5

Set up “Channel Select”

Use ui to select “Channel Select”, and then press ENTER .

AUTO SETUP

AUDYSSEY AUTO SETUP

STEP1 Preparation

Connect the speakers and place them according to the recommendations in the manual.

Set the following items if necessary.

Amp Assign

Channel Select

Auto Setup Start

MultEQ XT

[1/6]

ENTER Enter RETURN

Skip unused ch’s measurement for timesaving

Cancel

6 Use ui to select a channel.

Subwoofer Select for no subwoofers to be used. In this case, go to step 7.

Surround

Back

Select for no surround back speakers to be used. In this case, go to step 8.

• “Surround Back” can be set when

“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.

Front

Height

Select for no front height speakers to be used. In this case, go to step

9.

• “Front Height” can be set when

“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.

Front Wide Select for no front wide speakers to be used. In this case, go to step 9.

• “Front Wide” can be set when

“Amp Assign” is set to “Normal”.

7

G When “Subwoofer” is selected in

step 6H

Use o p to select the item.

Measure Set for measuring a subwoofer.

Skip Set for no measuring of a subwoofer.

52

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 52 2010/08/23 18:32:57

Set up speakers

8

G When “Surround Back” is selected

in step 6H

Use o p to select the item.

Measure

(2spkrs)

Set for measuring two surround back speakers.

Measure

(1spkr)

Set for measuring a surround back speaker.

Skip Set for no measuring of a surround back speaker.

9

G When “Front Height” or “Front

Wide” is selected in step 6H

Use o p to select the item.

Measure Set to measure the front height speakers or front wide speakers.

Skip Set when you do not want to measure the front height speakers or front wide speakers.

10 Press RETURN .

Proceed to page 9 STEP1 Preparation step 5.

NOTE

After performing Audyssey® Auto Setup, do not change the speaker connections or subwoofer volume. In event of a change, perform Audyssey

Auto Setup again.

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Connections (Advanced connection)

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROL jacks

When you use this unit connected to Marantz audio components, it sends operation signals to operate each component.

n

Connection

Use the remote connection cable (supplied with a Marantz audio component you want to connect) to connect the REMOTE CONTROL OUT terminal of this unit to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of the component to be connected.

n

Setting

Set the remote control switch located on the rear panel of the connected audio component to “EXTERNAL” or “EXT.” to use this feature.

• This setting will disable remote sensor reception of the connected audio component.

• To operate the connected audio component, point the remote control at the remote sensor of this unit.

Wireless receiver RX101 (vpage 23)

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 53

Remote control operation buttons

Remote control unit

NOTE

To use wireless receiver RX101 as external

IR receiver, set the remote sensor function of this unit to “Remote Lock:ON” (vpage 89

“Remote control settings”).

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

CD recorder

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT IN

MM7025

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

DVD player

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT IN

MM7055

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN OUT

CD player

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

53

2010/08/23 18:32:59

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

RS-232C connector

When you connect an external control device, you can control this unit with the external control device.

External serial controller

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks

SVENSKA

When a device with DC IN jack is connected, the connected device’s power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit.

The DC OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V/150 mA electrical signal.

12 V/150 mA trigger-compatible device

Perform the operation below beforehand.

q Turn on the power of this unit.

w Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller.

e Check that the unit is in the standby mode.

in Set as Necessary

Set to change the conditions for linked operation via the DC OUT

1 or 2 jack.

“Trigger Out 1” or “Trigger Out 2” (vpage 85)

NOTE

If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12V/150 mA, or has shorted, the DC OUT jack cannot be used.

In this case, turn off the power to the unit, and disconnect it.

54

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 54 2010/08/23 18:33:01

SVENSKA

Playback (Advanced operation)

Playback (Basic operation) (vpage 25)

Selecting a listening mode (Surround mode)

(vpage 44) n HDMI control function (vpage 55) n Sleep timer function (vpage 56) n Adjusting the volume of the speakers (vpage 56) n Operating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile

terminal to play music and still pictures (vpage 57) n Web control function (vpage 58) n Panel lock function (vpage 60) n Various memory functions (vpage 60)

NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Convenient functions

HDMI control function

When you make an HDMI connection with a TV or player compatible with this unit and HDMI control functions, you can perform the following operations by setting the HDMI control function of each device.

n This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step.

n You can switch audio output devices with a TV operation.

When you set “Output audio from amp” in the TV audio output setup operation, you can switch the amp power on.

n You can adjust this unit volume in the TV volume adjustment operation.

n You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching.

n When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.

1

2

3

4

Set the HDMI output connector corresponding with the HDMI control function.

Set “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) to “ON“.

Set the HDMI control function for all equipment connected by HDMI cable.

• Please consult the operating instructions for the connected equipment to check the settings.

• Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the equipment be unplugged.

Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.

5 Switch this unit input to the HDMI input source and check if the picture from the player is ok.

6

Turn the power on for all the equipment connected by HDMI cable.

When you turn the TV’s power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.

NOTE

• The HDMI control function only supports the HDMI OUT 1 connector.

To use the HDMI control function, connect the television to the

HDMI OUT 1 connector.

When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby power.

• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.

• Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check the user guide of each device for details beforehand.

• When “Power Off Control” on the menu is set to “OFF” (vpage 81), this unit is not set to standby even if the connected device is in the standby mode.

• When connection changes are implemented, such as adding connections to HDMI devices, linked operations may be initialized.

In this case, you will need to reconfi gure the settings.

• When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it is not possible to assign an

HDMI connector to “TV” at “Input Assign” (vpage 69).

If the HDMI control function does not operate properly, check the following points.

• Is the TV or player compatible with the HDMI control function?

• Is “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) set to “ON”?

• Is “Power Off Control” (vpage 81) set to “All” or “Video”?

• Are the HDMI control function settings of all equipment correct?

• Is the television connected to the HDMI OUT 1 connector?

NOTE

Should any of the operations below be performed, the interlocking function may be reset, in which case, repeat steps 2 and 3.

• “Input Assign” – “HDMI” (vpage 69) setting has changed.

• “Monitor Out” (vpage 80) setting is changed.

• There is a change to the connection between the equipment and the

HDMI, or an increase in equipment.

55

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 55 2010/08/23 18:33:02

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Convenient functions

Sleep timer function

The power automatically goes into standby once the set time has elapsed.

This is convenient for playing sources while going to sleep.

1 Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.

2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set.

The indicator on the display lights.

• If SLLEP on the main unit is pressed, the same function as with the remote control unit can be obtained.

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

Front Rear

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Adjusting the volume of the speakers

You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your taste, as described below.

n

Adjusting the volume of the different speakers

1 Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.

2 Press CH LVL .

CHANNEL LEVEL

Front L

Front R

Center

Subwoofer

Surround L

Surround R

S.Back L

S.Back R

Fader

Select n

Adjusting the volume of groups of speakers

(Fader function)

This function lets you adjust (fade) the sound all at once from the front (front speaker / front height speaker / front wide speaker / center speaker) or rear (surround speaker / surround back speaker).

1 Press AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation mode.

2 Press CH LVL .

CHANNEL LEVEL

Front L

Front R

Center

Subwoofer

Surround L

Surround R

S.Back L

S.Back R

Fader

Select

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

0.0dB

Front Rear

• The time switches as shown below each time SLEEP is pressed.

OFF 10 min 20 30 40 50

120 110 100 90 80 70 60

To cancel the sleep timer

Press SLEEP to set “OFF”.

The indicator on the display turns off.

3 Use ui to select the speaker.

The speaker that can be set switches each time one of the buttons is pressed.

4 Use o p to adjust the volume.

• In the case of a subwoofer, pressing o when it is at “–12 dB” will change the setting to “OFF”.

3

4

Press i to select “Fader”, then select the item to be

adjusting using o p.

Use o p to adjust the volume of the speakers.

(o : front, p: rear)

• The fader function does not affect the subwoofer.

• The fader can be adjusted until the volume of the speaker is adjusted to the lowest value of –12 dB.

• When a headphone jack is inserted, the headphone channel level can be adjusted.

• When the input mode setting is “7.1CH IN”, you can adjust the channel level while the 7.1CH INPUT connector is being used. In that case, “7.1CH IN Level” appears at the top of the screen.

• The sleep timer setting is canceled if this unit’s power is set to standby or turned off.

• When power to the main zone is turned off with the sleep timer, power in ZONE2 and ZONE3 are also turned off.

56

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 56 2010/08/23 18:33:03

e Start playback.

r Operate.

SVENSKA q Select content.

NEDERLANDS

Operating a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal to play music and still pictures

• Perform this procedure using a wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal conforming to the DLNA (Digital

Living Network Alliance) standard.

• This function allows you to play content located on a computer (media server) or mobile terminal device connected on a network by operating a mobile terminal device on the same network.

• There are two types of operations on the mobile terminal device.

n

Playing content on a computer (Media server)

This unit

Wireless LANcompatible router

Computer

(Media server)

Streaming Streaming

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS n

Playing contents on a mobile terminal device

This unit

Wireless LANcompatible router

DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Convenient functions

Mobile terminal device e Start playback.

r Operate.

q Select content.

w Select a player.

1 Select the content you want to play from among the mobile terminal devices.

2 From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the network.

Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.

• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly

Name” (vpage 82 “Friendly Name Edit”).

• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:

• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)

• Volume adjustment w Select a player.

Mobile terminal device

1 From the mobile terminal device, browse the media server on the same network and choose the content you want to play.

2 From the mobile terminal device, select this unit from among the products on the network.

Playback of the content selected in step 1 begins.

• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly

Name” (vpage 82 “Friendly Name Edit”).

• The following operations are possible from the mobile terminal device:

• File operations (play, stop, pause, track search)

• Volume adjustment

• is displayed on the menu screen while the mobile terminal device is being operated.

• For the various settings and operating procedures, see the operating instructions of the mobile terminal devices being used.

• When selecting this unit from the mobile terminal device, the name of this unit is displayed at “Friendly

Name”. “Friendly Name” can be edited at “Friendly Name Edit” (vpage 82) as desired so that it is easily distinguishable from other devices.

• When playback is started from the mobile terminal device, this unit’s input source automatically switches to “NET/USB”. Also, when the “Network Standby” setting (vpage  82) is set to “ON”, the power automatically turns on.

NOTE

When operations related to browsing or playback (play, stop, pause, track search) are performed on this unit while operating the mobile terminal device, the connection to the network is disconnected.

57

2010/08/23 18:33:03 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 57

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Convenient functions

Web control function

You can operate this unit using a browser.

1 Switch the “Network Standby” setting to “ON”.

(vpage 82).

2 Check the IP address of this unit with “Network

Information” (vpage 83).

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP

NETWORK INFORMATION

Friendly Name marantz:[AV7005]

DHCP ON

IP Address 192.168.100.19

MAC Address ************

Checking the IP address.

File http://192.168.100.19/index.asp

Edit View Favorites Tools Help

INDEX

Marantz Web Controller

AV7005

MAIN ZONE

Status

-25.0dB

Status

ZONE2

-25dB

Status

ZONE3

-60dB

FRANÇAIS

RETURN Return

3 Enter the IP address of this unit in browser’s address box.

For example, if the IP address of this unit is “192.168.100.19”, enter “http://192.168.100.19”.

q

ITALIANO

4

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

When the top menu is displayed, click on the menu item you want to operate.

w

MAIN ZONE

Status

-25.0dB

Status

ZONE2

-25dB

Status

ZONE3

-60dB r e t

Setup Menu

PDA Menu

Wed Control Config.

w Click when you operate each zone. (vGExample 1H) e Click when you operate the setup menu. (vGExample 2H) r Click to change the Web control screen setting.

(vGExample 3H) t Click when you operate a small screen such as a PDA screen, etc. (vGExample 4H)

5 Operate.

ZONE CONTROL >

CHANNEL LEVEL >

NET AUDIO / USB > iPod Direct >

G Example 1H Main zone control screen

MAIN ZONE

POWER

Sleep Timer y

SOURCE

ON

NET/USB

STANDBY u

RELOAD

TOP MENU

Add To Your Favorite o

Player

Video

Network

Tuner

∞ -80 -70

<

-60

-75.5dB

-50 -40 -30

>

-20 -10 0 10 18

Note

To use the web control function,set the GUI menu “Manual Setup” - “Network Setup” -

“Other” -“Network Standby” setting to “ON” y Click to perform individual operations.

Changes to individual operation screens. (vGExample 5H) u Click when you update to the latest information.

Normally, there is a change to the latest information each time you operate. When operating from the main unit, click this or else the screen will not be updated.

i Click to return to the top menu.

Displayed when setting “Top Menu Link Setup” to “ON” in

G Example 3H o Click to add a setting to “Favorites” in your browser.

We recommend registering the setting screens for the different zones in the browser’s favorites so as not to accidentally perform menu operations for zones you do not intend to operate.

q Entering the IP address.

Setup Menu

Wed Control Config.

58

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 58 2010/08/23 18:33:04

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

SETUP MENU

SAVE

LOAD

Q0

SOURCE SELECT

AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST

MANUAL SETUP

INFORMATION

Q1

G Example 2H Setup menu screen

SOURCE SELECT ReLoad

Source DVD

Input Assign

Q2

Video

Video Select

Video Mode

Video Convert

SOURCE

Auto

ON i/p Scaler

Resolution(analog)

Resolution(HDMI)

Progressive Mode

Aspect

Q3

Game

OFF

Movie

Analog Analog & HDMI OFF

Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz

Auto 480p/576p 1080i 720p 1080p 1080p:24Hz

AUTO VIDEO1 VIDEO2

Full Normal

G Example 4H PDA menu screen

Marantz Web Controller

Main Zone Control

Multi Zone2 Control

Multi Zone3 Control

Q8

Q8 Select this item to operate each zone.

Input Mode

Input Mode

Decode Mode

Auto

Auto

Rename DVD Set Def Q4

Q5

NOTE

You cannot change setup menu operations and zone name on the

PDA menu screen.

Source Level(analog) <

Web Controller Config.

Q6

Q7

0 dB < Set

Source Level(digital) < 0 dB < Set

Q0 Click the menu item from which you want to make settings.

>

Q1 Click “SAVE” when you want to save settings, and click

“LOAD” when you want to call settings.

Q2 Click “v” and select from the displayed items.

Q3 Click an item to make a setting.

CHANNEL LEVEL >

NET AUDIO/USB > iPod Direct

Q4 After entering characters, click “Set” to set, or click “Def” to return to default setting.

Q5 Enter fi gures or click “<” or “>” to make the setting, and then click “Set”.

RELOAD

>

G Example 3H Web confi guration screen

Top Menu Link Setup

ON OFF

Back Top Menu

Q6 Click “ON” when performing Top Menu Link Setup.

When set up, return to the top menu from each operation screen.

(Default setting : “OFF”)

Q7 Click this item to return to the top menu.

G Example 5H Net Audio operating screen

NET AUDIO/USB(MAIN ZONE)

Now Playing

HOT LOVE & EMOTION

/VIRGINELLE

128kbps

W0

Q9

W1 W2

W3

W4

PRESET OFF

< -75.5dB

PRESET MEMORY

ONE

∞ -80

REPEAT

ALL

-70 -60

A1 MEMORY

OFF

-50 -40 -30

CHARACTER SEARCH

RANDOM

ON OFF

-20 -10 0 10 18

W6

W5

>

Q9 Click the menu items. from which you want to play.

W0 Click “v” to select the preset channel you want to play.

W1 When registering presets, click “v” to select the channel you want to register, and then click “MEMORY”.

W2 When searching using an acronym, click “v” and select from the displayed characters.

W3 Click this item to play back repeatedly.

W4 Click this item when selecting menu items.

W5 Click to stop playback.

W6 Click this item to play back randomly.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Convenient functions

G Example 6H Dedicated iPod Touch screen

Main Zone

Zone Power

Source iPod Direct NetAudio/USB

Volume

Down Up

-60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0

• When accessed from the iPod Touch browser, an optimized operation screen is displayed.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 59

59

2010/08/23 18:33:04

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Convenient functions

Panel lock function

To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.

n

Disabling all key button operations

ON/STANDBY

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS n

Canceling the Panel lock function

ON/STANDBY i

SVENSKA

Various memory functions

n

Personal memory plus function

This function sets the settings (input mode, surround mode, HDMI output mode, MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ®, Dynamic Volume®, audio delay etc.) last selected for the individual input sources.

DISPLAY

Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold i and

DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.

The Panel lock function is canceled.

AUTO DISPLAY

Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold AUTO and

DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.

“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations except ON/STANDBY are disabled.

n

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME

ON/STANDBY VOLUME

Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.

The surround parameters, tone settings and the volumes of the different speakers are stored for the individual surround modes. n

Last function memory

This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.

When the power is turned back on, the settings are restored.

PURE DIRECT DISPLAY

Press ON/STANDBY while you press and hold PURE

DIRECT and DISPLAY with the unit in standby mode.

“Panel Lock:ON” appears on the display and all button operations except ON/STANDBY and VOLUME are disabled.

60

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 60 2010/08/23 18:33:05

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Separate room)

• You can operate this unit so as to enjoy audio in a room (ZONE2, ZONE3) other than the MAIN ZONE

(room where the unit is located).

• You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

“Amp Assign” setting

(vpage 78) and audio signals output

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH

Connecting the speakers

ENGLISH

Audio output

There are two methods to do this, as described below. Choose one of the methods.

q Zone playback by audio output(UNBALANCED and BALANCED) w Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)

Use an external amplifier.

q

Zone playback by audio output (UNBALANCED and BALANCED)

Using the amplifier assign function, zone 2 and zone 3 auto signals are output from this unit’s UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals.

n

Connecting and setting the speakers

(Example of connections to Marantz MM7025 power amp)

“Amp Assign” setting

(vpage 78) and audio signals output

Connecting the speakers

ZONE3

ZONE3

Output signal :

Stereo (L / R)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

ZONE3

(L) w q w

(R) q w

Zone playback by audio output (PRE OUT)

n

Audio connections (ZONE2, ZONE3)

The audio signals of this unit’s ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals are output to the ZONE2 and

ZONE3 amplifiers and played on these amplifiers.

ZONE2 MAIN ZONE ZONE3

ZONE2

ZONE2

ZONE2

Output signal :

Stereo (L / R)

L

R

This unit

L

R w

(L) q w

(R) q

AUX IN AUX IN

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

We recommend using high quality pin-plug cables for audio connections in order to prevent noise.

NOTE

• When the input source to which the digital input connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are assigned is selected in ZONE2 or ZONE3, playback is only possible if the digital signal being input is in PCM (2-channel) format.

• It is not possible to play the digital audio signals input from the HDMI terminals in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Use analog connections for ZONE2 or ZONE3 playback.

• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors.

• The menu screen is not output.

61

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 61 2010/08/23 18:33:06

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Video output

Video Connection

The video signals of this unit’s ZONE2 video output terminal are played by the ZONE2 TV.

MAIN ZONE ZONE2

This unit

VIDEO

ZONE2

VIDEO

IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Y P B P R

NOTE

• It is not possible to output video signals input to the HDMI terminals to ZONE2.

• When using component output terminal 2 for ZONE2 video signal output, set “Manual Setup” – “Option Setup” – “Component2

Output” (vpage 85) in the menu to “ZONE2”.

• The menu screen is not output.

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Playback

1 Press Z2 or Z3 to switch the remote control operating mode.

The remote control unit switches to the operating mode for ZONE2 or ZONE3.

2 Press ON to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power.

The or indicator on the display lights.

• When STANDBY

ZONE3 turns off.

is pressed, ZONE2 or

• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing SOURCE ON/OFF .

• Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing ZONE2 ON/OFF

ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.

or

3 Press INPUT df .

The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or

ZONE3.

• Turn INPUT SELECTOR after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to select an input source.

Adjusting the volume

Use VOLUME to adjust the volume.

G Adjustable rangeH – – – –80dB – –40dB – 18dB

(When the “Volume Display” (vpage 84) setting is “Relative”)

G Adjustable rangeH 0 41 99

(When the “Volume Display” (vpage 84) setting is “Absolute”)

• At time of purchase, “Volume Limit” (vpage 83) is set to “–10dB

(71)”.

Turn VOLUME after pressing ZONE SELECT on the main unit to adjust the sound volume.

Turning off the sound temporarily

Press MUTE .

The sound is reduced to the level set at “Mute Level” (vpage 84) in the menu.

• To cancel, either adjust the volume or press MUTE again.

• The setting is canceled when the zone’s power is turned off.

You can adjust the tone and volume for ZONE2 and ZONE3 in “Zone

Setup” (vpage 83) in the menu.

When power for both MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 is set to ON, power of the MAIN ZONE only can be turned off. Select “AMP” in step 1 then press STANDBY .

62

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 62 2010/08/23 18:33:06

SVENSKA

How to make detailed settings

Menu map

For menu operation, connect a TV to this unit and display the menu on the TV screen. For menu operations, see the following page.

Setting items

1. Audio/Video Adjust

AUDIO/VIDEO ADJUST

Audio Adjust

Picture Adjust

2. Information

INFORMATION

MENU

Audio/Video Adjust

Information

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Input Setup

Audio Input Signal

HDMI Information

Preset Channel

3. Auto Setup

Adjust various audio and video parameters

Items that only need to be set once

Set these for example upon purchase.

Once these items are set, there is no need to set them again unless the speaker layout or the connected speakers have been changed.

NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL

Detailed items

Audio Adjust

Picture Adjust

Status

Audio Input Signal

HDMI Information

Preset Channel

Audyssey Auto Setup

Parameter Check

Audyssey Auto Setup

Parameter Check

4. Manual Setup

MANUAL SETUP

Speaker Setup

Optimize settings for speakers in use

Audio Setup

Network Setup

Zone Setup

Option Setup

Speaker Setup

HDMI Setup

Audio Setup

Network Setup

Zone Setup

Option Setup

5. Input Setup

(Example: “HD Radio”)

Make detailed speaker settings

INPUT SETUP

Auto Preset

Preset Skip

Preset Name

Video

Rename

Source Level

Displayed items of the “Input Setup” menu differs, depending on the selected input source.

Auto Preset

Preset Skip

Parental Lock

Antenna Aiming

Preset Name

Input Assign

Video

Input Mode

Rename

Source Level

Playback Mode

Still Picture

ITALIANO FRANÇAIS

Adjuts various audio parameters.

Description

Adjusts the picture quality.

DEUTSCH

Shows information about current settings.

Shows information about audio input signals.

Displays the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information.

Shows information about tuner or network preset channels.

ENGLISH

Makes the optimum settings for the speakers being used automatically.

Checks Audyssey® Auto Setup measurement results.

This item is only displayed after Audyssey Auto Setup procedure has been performed.

Sets the speaker size and distance, the channel level, etc.

Makes settings for HDMI video/audio output.

Makes settings for audio playback.

Makes network settings.

Makes settings for audio playback in a multi-zone (ZONE2/ZONE3) system.

Makes various other settings.

Uses the auto preset function to program radio stations.

Sets the preset memories that you do not want to display when tuning.

Sets the Parental Lock.

Adjusts the SIRIUS reception sensitivity.

Assigns name to a preset memory.

Changes input connector assignment.

Makes the video settings.

Sets the audio input mode and decode mode.

Changes the display name for this source.

Adjusts the playback level of the audio input.

Makes settings for iPod, USB memory device or network source playback.

Makes settings for still picture playback.

Page

73

77

78

80

81

81

83

84

68

69

71

71

71

67

67

67

68

68

71

72

88

88

88

88

8

12

63

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 63 2010/08/23 18:33:07

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Examples of menu and front display

Below we describe typical examples of displays on the TV screen and on the set’s display window.

Menu display

Top menu display

w

MENU

Audio/Video Adjust

Information

Auto Setup

Manual Setup

Input Setup q

NEDERLANDS

Front display

*MENU

A/V Adjust – w

Display when changing settings

Display when inputting characters

Adjust various audio and video parameters w

INPUT SETUP

INPUT ASSIGN

Default

BD

DVD

VCR

SAT

GAME

AUX1

TV

[ HDMI ] q

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI4

HDMI3

HDMI5

HDMI6

None

[ DIGITAL ]

None

Coax1

None

Coax2

None

Opt3

Opt1

[ COMP ]

1-RCA

2-RCA

4-RCA

3-RCA

None

None

None

Select ENTER Enter RETURN

Change HDMI input connector assignment

Return

Press ENTER .

INPUT SETUP

INPUT ASSIGN

[ HDMI ] Default

BD

DVD

VCR

SAT

GAME

AUX1

TV e

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI4

HDMI3

HDMI5

HDMI6

None

[ DIGITAL ]

None

Coax1

None

Coax2

None

Opt3

Opt1

Select ENTER Enter

Assign HDMI 1 input connector

[ COMP ]

1-RCA

2-RCA

4-RCA

3-RCA

None

None

None

RETURN Cancel

INPUT SETUP

RENAME

DVD

Default

DVD w q

*Input Assign

BD [HDMI1 ] q

Press ENTER .

*Input Assign

BD •HDMI1 – e

*Rename:DVD

•DVD – q

Display when resetting

SHIFT

Input a/A

ENTER

SEARCH

Enter

Keyboard

RETURN Cancel

INPUT SETUP

RENAME q

DVD

Default

DVD

*Rename

Default q

Press ENTER .

SVENSKA

Description q The menu items are displayed here.

w The selected line is displayed here.

The currently selected item is displayed on the display.

Use ui to move to the item you want to set.

q Use uio p to move to the item you want to set.

w Press ENTER to set to the mode in which the setting can be made.

e “ 0 ” and “ 1 ” is displayed at the sides of item whose setting can be changed. Use o p to change to the desired setting.

q When w When o p ui

is pressed, the cursor moves to the left or right.

is pressed at the position where you want to input the character, the character is input.

For inputting characters on a keyboard screen or with the number buttons on the remote control unit, see page 65. q Press w Press i to select “Default”, then press ENTER to set.

o to select “Yes”, then press ENTER .

ENTER Enter RETURN Return

*Rename

Default? :•No

64

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 64 2010/08/23 18:33:08

Inputting characters

You can change the names as desired using the “Preset Name”

(vpage 68), “Rename” (vpage 71), “Rhapsody Account” (vpage 83),

“Napster Account” (vpage 83), “Zone Rename” (vpage 85) and character input for the network functions.

For inputting characters, there are three methods, as shown below.

Method for inputting characters

Method

Using the cursor buttons

(Normal screen)

Operations

• Operating with the remote control unit or the main unit.

• Use uio p and ENTER to input characters.

Using the keyboard screen

• Operating with the remote control unit.

• Select a character on the TV screen to input characters.

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Edit

Default

SEARCH

Input

Keyboard

ENTER

INSERT

Enter

Insert q Character input section w Guide for operation buttons

ESPAÑOL

G Account input / Search by text / Proxy Name /

Friendly Name EditH

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER

FRIENDLY NAME EDIT m arantz:[AV7005]

RETURN

DELETE

Cancel

Delete q w

Normal screen

n

Display of a normal input screen

G Rename / Zone RenameH

INPUT SETUP

RENAME

DVD

Default

SHIFT

Input a/A

D VD w

ENTER

SEARCH

Enter

Keyboard

RETURN Cancel q

ITALIANO

Using the cursor buttons

1 Display the screen for inputting characters

(vpage 63 “Menu map”).

2 Use o p to set the cursor to the character you want to change.

3 Use ui to change the character, then press ENTER .

• The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.

G Upper case charactersH

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

G Lower case charactersH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

G SymbolsH ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) z + , - . / : ; <

= > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ˜

G NumbersH 0123456789 (Space)

• The input character type can be switched by pressing

MENU while the display name is being changed.

SHIFT/TOP

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change the name then press

ENTER to register it. e r t e r t

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH

Keyboard screen

n

Display of a keyboard input screen

G Rename / Zone RenameH

INPUT SETUP

RENAME

BD

0

$

A

N

1

%

B

O

2

&

C

P

3

D

Q

(

4

E

R w

)

5

F

S

BD

G

T

6 z

7

+

H

U

,

8

I

V

;

9

J

W

!

<

K

X

=

L

Y

#

>

M

Z

SHIFT

Select a/A

ENTER

SEARCH

Input

Normal

ENGLISH

RETURN Cancel

G Account input / Search by text / Proxy Name /

Friendly Name EditH

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP OTHER

FRIENDLY NAME EDIT

0

_ a n

Edit w

1

/ b o

:

2 c p

3

˜ d q

4

?

e r marantz:[AV7005]

[

5 f s

6

\ t g

]

7 h u

8

^ i v

9

ˋ j w

{

.

k x

|

@ l y

}

m z

Clear Space 0 1 Ins Del O K

SHIFT

Select a/A y

ENTER

SEARCH

Input

Normal o Q0

RETURN Cancel q u i q Character input section w Cursor e Keyboard section r Clear key t Space key y Cursor keys u OK key i Guide for operation buttons o Insert key

Q0 Delete key q u i

65

2010/08/23 18:33:09 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 65

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Inputting characters

1 Display the screen for inputting characters

(vpage 63 “Menu map”).

2 Press SEARCH/INFO while a normal screen is displayed.

A keyboard screen is displayed.

3 Select a character to be changed. q or .

w uio

ENTER p to select

to place the cursor at the character to be changed.

Each time ENTER is pressed, the cursor moves by one character.

4 Select a character to be input with press ENTER . uio p then

• The types of characters that can be input are as shown below.

G Upper case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ

0123456789

! “ # $ % & ’ ( ) z + , ; < = >

G Lower case characters/Numbers/SymbolsH abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

0123456789

. @ - _ / : ˜ ? [ \ ] ^ ` { | }

• The input character type can be switched by pressing

MENU while the display name is being changed.

SHIFT/TOP

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the name.

6 Use uio p to select , then press ENTER .

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Input Setup

Perform settings related to input source playback.

• You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Menu operation

1 Press mode.

AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation

2 Press MENU .

The menu is displayed on the TV screen.

3 Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.

4 Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.

• To return to the previous item, press RETURN .

• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.

The menu display disappears.

Important information

n

About the display of input sources

In this section, the configurable input sources for each item are shown as follows.

BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 NET/USB TV CD CDR PHONO SIRIUS

HD Radio M-XPort

NOTE

Input sources that have been set to “Delete” at “Source Delete” (vpage 84) cannot be selected.

66

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 66

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:09

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Items that can be set with the Input Setup procedure

Auto Preset (vpage 67) Preset Skip (vpage 67)

INPUT SETUP

AUTO PRESET

Start

ENTER

Start the auto preset process

Enter RETURN Return

Antenna Aiming (vpage 68)

INPUT SETUP

ANTENNA AIMING

Satellite

Terrestrial

INPUT SETUP

PRESET SKIP

Block

A Block Presets

A1 FM 87.50MHz

A2 FM 87.90MHz

A3 FM 89.10MHz

A4 FM 93.30MHz

A5 FM 97.90MHz

A6 AM 98.10MHz

A7 AM 98.90MHz

A8 AM 100.10MHz

ON

ON

ON

ON

A

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

[1/7]

RETURN Return

Change memory blocks

Preset Name (vpage 68)

INPUT SETUP

PRESET NAME

Block

A1 FM 87.50MHz

A2 FM 87.90MHz

A3 FM 89.10MHz

A4 FM 93.30MHz

A5 FM 97.90MHz

A6 AM 98.10MHz

A7 AM 98.90MHz

A8 AM 100.10MHz

[1/7]

A

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

[ ]

Parental Lock (vpage 67)

INPUT SETUP

PARENTAL LOCK

Lock Setting

Edit Lock Code

Set a listening limit to any channel

Input Assign (vpage 68)

Default

BD

DVD

VCR

SAT

GAME

AUX1

TV

INPUT SETUP

INPUT ASSIGN

[ HDMI ]

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI4

HDMI3

HDMI5

HDMI6

None

[ DIGITAL ]

None

Coax1

None

Coax2

None

Opt3

Opt1

[ COMP ]

1-RCA

2-RCA

4-RCA

3-RCA

None

None

None

Adjust antenna position for best signal

RETURN Return

Video (vpage 69)

INPUT SETUP

VIDEO

RETURN Return

Change memory blocks

Input Mode (vpage 71)

INPUT SETUP

INPUT MODE

Select ENTER Enter RETURN

Change HDMI input connector assignment

Return

Rename (vpage 71)

INPUT SETUP

RENAME

Input Mode

Decode Mode

Auto

Auto

DVD

Default

DVD Video Select

Video Mode

Video Convert i/p Scaler

Resolution(Analog)

Resolution(HDMI)

Progressive Mode

Aspect

Source

Auto

ON

Analog & HDMI

Auto

Auto

Auto

Full

RETURN Return

Select desired video input source

Source Level (vpage 71)

INPUT SETUP

SOURCE LEVEL

Analog Input

Digital Input

0dB

0dB

RETURN

Automatically detect input signal and playback

Return

Playback Mode (vpage 71)

INPUT SETUP

PLAYBACK MODE

Repeat

Random

OFF

OFF

RETURN Return

Still Picture (vpage 72)

INPUT SETUP

STILL PICTURE

Slide Show

Interval

OFF

5sec

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Input Setup

Auto Preset

Use the auto preset function to program radio stations.

Setting items

Start

Start the auto preset process.

Setting details

If an FM station cannot be preset automatically, select the desired station by tuning it in manually, then preset it manually.

HD Radio

Preset Skip

Default settings are underlined.

Set preset channel to be skipped when selecting.

Setting items

A – G

Set the preset channels you do not want to display. You can set by preset memory block (A to G) or by preset channel (1 to 8).

Setting details

1 – 8 : Set by individual preset channels in the currently selected preset memory block.

ON : Display the selected preset channel.

Skip : Do not display the selected preset channel.

If you set “Block Presets” to “Skip”, you can skip the preset memory blocks (A to G).

SIRIUS HD Radio

Parental Lock

Default settings are underlined.

For any channel, set the radio reception limits.

Setting items

Lock Setting

Set the channel radio reception limits.

SIRIUS

Setting details

1. Press ui to select “Lock Setting”, and then press p or ENTER .

2. Pressing

ENTER .

uio p , input the password (4 digits number) and press

3. Select channel by pressing ui , and set the lock by pressing o p .

Unlock : Do not lock selected channel(s).

Lock : Lock selected channel(s). When a Parental Locked channel is tuned, “Enter Lock Code” is displayed, then input the password.

RETURN

Compensate analog audio input playback level

Return

Cancel repeat mode

RETURN Return RETURN

Display only the selected still picture image

Return

• The default password is “0000”.

• If the password is wrong, “Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed. Input the correct password.

• While listening to the channel being played, you can also set parental lock (vpage 32).

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 67

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

67

2010/08/23 18:33:10

ENGLISH

Input Setup

Setting items

Edit Lock Code

Change the password.

SIRIUS

DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Setting details

1. Press ui to select “Edit Lock Code”, and then press p or ENTER .

2. Input current lock code (4 digits) using uio p , and press ENTER .

3. Input new lock code (4 digits) using uio p , and press ENTER .

4. Input new lock code (4 digits) again using uio p , and press ENTER .

5. Press ui to select “Execute”, and then press ENTER .

If the correct password is input, “Completed” is displayed, and the new password is modified.

• If the old password is incorrectly input, “Current Lock Code is incorrect” is displayed, and proceed again from step 1.

• If the password input is 3 digits or less, “Enter 4 digits number” is displayed, and input again with a 4 digit password.

• If the new password is not correctly input, “New Lock Codes do not

Match” is displayed and the password does not change.

Antenna Aiming

Install the antenna with radio reception sensitivity set to maximum.

Setting items

Satellite

Indicate satellite signal strength.

SIRIUS

Terrestrial

Indicate terrestrial signal strength.

¡¡¡

¡¡

¡

Display

Setting details

Condition

Signal strength is excellent

Signal strength is good

Signal strength is weak

No signal

SIRIUS

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Input Assign

Examples of input assign menu screen displays

q

INPUT SETUP

INPUT ASSIGN

Default [ HDMI ]

BD

DVD

VCR

SAT

GAME

AUX1

TV

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI4

HDMI3

HDMI5

HDMI6

None

[ DIGITAL ]

None

Coax1

None

Coax2

None

Opt3

Opt1

[ COMP ]

1-RCA

2-RCA

4-RCA

3-RCA

None

None

None

Select w ENTER Enter e RETURN

Change HDMI input connector assignment r q Input Source w HDMI input e Digital audio input r Component video input

Input assignments menu operations

1 Use uio p to move the highlight to the item you want to set.

2 Press ENTER assigned.

, then use o p to select the input connector to be

3 Press ENTER to register the setting.

NOTE

If all “HDMI”, “Digital” and “Component” assignment of the Game source are set to “None”, Game source cannot be selected with the input source selection.

Preset Name

Assign name to a preset memory.

Setting items

A1 – G8

Select the preset channel.

HD Radio

Default

The changed preset name is returned to the default setting.

Setting details

• Up to eight characters can be input.

• For character input, see page 65.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

68

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 68 2010/08/23 18:33:10

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Setting items

HDMI

Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME AUX1

TV

HDMI 1 / HDMI 2 / HDMI 3 / HDMI 4 / HDMI 5 / HDMI 6

None : Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.

Setting details

• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below.

Input source

BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 TV

Default setting

HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 4

HDMI

3

HDMI

5

HDMI

6

None

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Input Setup

Setting items

Component

Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to the input sources.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME AUX1

TV

Setting details

1-RCA / 2-RCA / 3-RCA / 4-RCA (Component video)

None : Do not assign a component video input connector to the selected input source.

• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below.

Input source

Default setting

BD

1-RCA

DVD

2-RCA

VCR

4-RCA

SAT

3-RCA

GAME

None

AUX1

None

TV

None

Digital

Set this to change the digital input connectors assigned to the input sources.

• An input source to which an HDMI input connector cannot be assigned is displayed as “– – –”.

• To play the video signal assigned at “HDMI” combined with the audio signal assigned at “Input Assign“ – “Digital”, select “Digital” at “Input

Mode” (vpage 71).

• The audio signals input from the analog and digital connectors are not output to the monitor.

• When “HDMI Control” (vpage 80) is set to “ON”, HDMI input connector cannot be assigned to “TV”.

Coax1 – 2 (COAXIAL) / Opt1 – 3 (OPTICAL)

None : Do not assign a digital input connector to the selected input source.

• At time of purchase, the settings of the different input sources are as shown below.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME AUX1

TV

CD CDR

SIRIUS

Input source

Default setting

BD

None

DVD

Coax

1

VCR

None

SAT

Coax

2

GAME

None

AUX1

Opt

3

Input source TV

Default setting

Opt

1

CD CDR SIRIUS

Opt

2

None None

Default

The “Input Assign” settings are returned to the default settings.

An input source to which an component video input connector cannot be assigned is displayed as “– – –”.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

If you select “Default” and press ENTER , the message “Default

Setting?” is displayed. Select “Yes” or “No”, and then press ENTER .

Video

Default settings are underlined.

Set the source video.

z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been assigned.

Setting items

Video Select

Video of another input source is played back combined with the playing audio.

Setting details

Source : Play the picture and sound of the input source.

BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV : Select video input source to view. This can be set for individual input sources.

“GAME” and “TV” can be selected only when a component video is assigned as an input source.

NOTE

• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.

• Input sources for which “Delete” is selected at “Source Delete” (vpage  84) cannot be selected.

• This can also be set by pressing remote control unit.

V.SEL

on the

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 69

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

69

2010/08/23 18:33:11

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Input Setup

Setting items

Video Mode

Make settings for video processing.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME z

AUX1 TV z

FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Setting details

Auto : Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.

Movie : Process video normally.

Game : Always process video appropriate for game content.

• If “Video Mode” is set to “Auto”, the mode is switched according to the input contents.

• If a source is played in both MAIN ZONE (audio and video) and ZONE2

(audio only) modes in the same room, audio in MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 modes may sound out of synchronization, but this is not malfunction. In this case, setting to “Game” mode may improve audio synchronization.

ON : The input video signal is converted.

OFF : The input video signal is not converted.

Video Convert

The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with the connected TV (vpage 14

“Converting input video signals for output (Video conversion function)”).

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME z

AUX1 TV z i/p Scaler

Convert the input source’s resolution to the resolution set at “Resolution”.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME z

AUX1 NET/USB

TV z

• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. In this case set “Video Convert” to “OFF”.

• When “Video Convert” is set to “OFF”, the video conversion function does not work. In this case, connect this unit and TV with the same type of cable.

Analog : Use i/p scaler function for analog video signal.

Analog & HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.

HDMI : Use i/p scaler function for HDMI video signal.

OFF : Do not use i/p scaler function.

• “Analog & HDMI” and “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which an

HDMI input connector is assigned.

• Which items can be set depend on the input source assigned to each input connector.

• This function is not effective when the input signal is x.v.Color, 3D, sYCC 601 color, Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC 601 color or computer resolution.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Setting items

Resolution

Set the output resolution.

Resolution (Analog) :

Analog Video

Resolution (HDMI) : HDMI

Setting details

Auto : The number of pixels the TV connected to the HDMI output connector supports is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set.

480p / 576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 1080p:24Hz : Set the output resolution.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME z

AUX1 NET/USB

TV z

Progressive Mode

Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.

• This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than

“OFF”.

• When “i/p Scaler” is set to ”Analog & HDMI”, the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set.

• To watch 1080p/24Hz pictures, use a TV that supports 1080p/24Hz video signals.

• When set to “1080p/24Hz”, you can enjoy film-like pictures for film sources (in 24 Hz). For video sources and mixed sources, we recommend setting the resolution to “1080p”.

• It is not possible to convert a 50 Hz signal into 1080p/24Hz. It is output at a resolution of 1080p/50Hz.

Auto : The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set.

Video1 : Select mode suitable for video playback

Video2 : Select mode suitable for video and 30-frame film material playback.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME z

AUX1 TV z

Aspect

Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the

HDMI.

This item can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than

“OFF”.

Full : Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.

Normal : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio.

“Aspect” can be set when “i/p Scaler” is set to anything other than

“OFF”.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME z

AUX1 NET/USB

TV z z “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been assigned.

70

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 70

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:11

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Input Setup

Input Mode

Default settings are underlined.

The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.

Setting items

Input Mode

Set the audio input modes for the different input sources.

Setting details

Auto : Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.

HDMI : Play only signals from HDMI input.

Digital : Play only signals from digital input.

Analog : Play only signals from analog input.

7.1CH IN : Only signals input from the 7.1CH INPUT terminal will be played back.

Rename

Change the display name of the selected input source.

Setting items

Rename

Change the display name of the selected input source.

Default

The input source name is returned to the default setting.

Setting details

• Up to eight characters can be input.

• For character input, see page 65.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

Decode Mode

Set the decode mode for input source.

BD DVD VCR

SAT GAME AUX1

TV

CD CDR

• This can also be set by pressing A/D on the remote control unit.

• Each time A/D is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.

Auto HDMI Digital Analog

7.1CH IN

• “HDMI” can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” is assigned at

“Input Assign” (vpage 69).

• “Digital” can be set for input sources for which “Digital” is assigned at

“Input Assign” (vpage 69).

• If the input source is set to “TV” or “Game”, it cannot be set to “Analog”.

• When digital signals are properly input, the indicator lights on the display. If the indicator does not light, check the digital input connector assignment and the connections.

• The surround mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to “7.1CH IN”.

• If “HDMI Control” is set to “ON” and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI OUT connectors, the input mode whose input source is “TV” is fixed to ARC.

Auto : Detect type of digital input signal and decode and play automatically.

PCM : Decode and play only PCM input signals.

DTS : Decode and play only DTS input signals.

• This item can be set for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign” (vpage 68).

• Normally set this mode to “Auto”. Set “PCM” and “DTS” when inputting the corresponding input signal.

Source Level

• This function corrects the playback level of the selected input source’s audio input.

• Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.

Setting details

–12dB – +12dB (0dB)

The analog input level and digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which “HDMI” or “Digital” is assigned at “Input Assign“ (vpage 68).

Playback Mode

Default settings are underlined.

Make settings for repeat playback mode or random playback mode.

Setting items

Repeat

Make settings for repeat mode.

Setting details

All : All files are played repeatedly.

One : A file being played is played repeatedly.

OFF : Repeat playback mode is canceled.

NET/USB

Random

Make random mode settings.

NET/USB

ON : Enable random playback.

OFF : Disable random playback.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 71

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

71

2010/08/23 18:33:11

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Input Setup

Still Picture

Default settings are underlined.

Make settings for playing back still picture images.

Setting items

Slide Show

Make slide show settings.

Setting details

ON : Display still picture images in a slide show.

OFF : Display only the selected still picture image.

NET/USB

Interval

Set the playback time per image.

NET/USB

5sec60sec

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Audio/Video Adjust

The sound being played in the surround mode can be adjusted to your liking.

The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set surround mode. For details on the adjustable parameters, see “Surround modes and parameters”

(vpage 104).

Menu operation

1 Press mode.

AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation

2 Press MENU .

The menu is displayed on the TV screen.

3 Use ui to select the menu to be set or operated.

4 Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.

• To return to the previous item, press RETURN .

• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.

The menu display disappears.

Items that can be set with the Audio/Video Adjust procedure

Audio Adjust (vpage 73) n Surround Parameter (vpage 73) n Tone (vpage 73) n Audyssey Settings (vpage 74) n A-DSX Soundstage (vpage 75) n Manual EQ (vpage 76) n M-DAX (vpage 76) n Audio Delay (vpage 76)

Picture Adjust (vpage 77)

72

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 72

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:11

Audio Adjust

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS n

Surround Parameter

Default settings are underlined.

Adjust surround sound parameters. It may not be possible to set this item depending on the input signal.

Setting details Setting items

HT-EQ

Soften the treble range of movie soundtracks for better understanding.

DRC

Compress dynamic range

(difference between loud and soft sounds).

D.Comp

Compress dynamic range

(difference between loud and soft sounds).

LFE

Adjust the low-frequency effects level (LFE).

ON : “HT-EQ” is used.

OFF : “HT-EQ” is not used.

Auto : Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source. This can be set in the Dolby TrueHD mode.

Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.

OFF : Dynamic range compression always off.

Low / Mid / High : These set the compression level.

OFF : Turn dynamic range compression off.

–10dB – 0dB

For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the values below.

• Dolby Digital sources : “0dB”

• DTS movie sources : “0dB”

• DTS music sources : “–10dB”

0.0 – 1.0 (0.3) C.Image

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.

Panorama

Assign front L/R signal also to surround channels for wider sound.

Dimension

Shift sound image center to front or rear to adjust playback balance.

C.Width

Assign center channel signal to front left and right channels for wider sound.

ON : Set.

OFF : Do not set.

0 – 6 (3)

0 – 7 (3)

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Audio/Video Adjust

Setting items

Height Gain

Control the front height channel volume.

Setting details

Low : Reduce the front height channel volume.

Mid : Front height channel sound is output with standard sound volume.

High : Increase the front height channel volume.

Default

The “Surround Parameter” settings are returned to the default settings.

NOTE

“Height Gain” is displayed for the following settings.

• When “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.

• When the “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” setting (vpage 78) is set other than to “None”.

• When surround mode is “PLgz” or the PLgz decoder is used.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

n

Tone

Adjust the tonal quality of the sound.

Setting items Setting details

Tone Control

Set the tone control function to ON and OFF.

ON : Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble).

OFF : Playback without tone adjustment.

“Tone Control” can be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to

“OFF”.

NOTE

• “Tone Control” settings are not reflected to ZONE2 and ZONE3.

• The tone cannot be adjusted in the direct mode.

–6dB – +6dB Bass

Adjust low frequency range

(bass).

Treble

Adjust high frequency range

(treble).

“Bass” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.

–6dB – +6dB

“Treble” can be set when “Tone Control” is set to “ON”.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 73

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

73

2010/08/23 18:33:12

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Audio/Video Adjust n

Audyssey Settings

Default settings are underlined.

Set MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ® and Dynamic Volume®. These can be selected after Audyssey® Auto

Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see page 109.

NOTE

If you have not performed Auto Setup, or if you change the speaker settings after performing Auto Setup, you may not be able to select Dynamic EQ/Dynamic Volume, and “Run Audyssey” may be displayed.

In this case, either perform Audyssey Auto Setup over again or perform “Restore” (vpage 12) to return to the settings after Audyssey Auto Setup was run.

Setting items

MultEQ XT

Select one equalizer from three modes. MultEQ XT corrects both time and frequency response problems in the listening area based on Audyssey

Auto Setup calibration. We recommend “Audyssey”.

MultEQ XT is the prerequisite function for

Dynamic EQ and Dynamic

Volume.

Setting details

Audyssey : Optimize the frequency response of all speakers.

Audyssey Byp.L/R : Optimize frequency response of speakers except front L and R speakers.

Audyssey Flat : Optimize frequency response of all speakers to flat response.

Manual : Apply frequency response set with “Manual EQ” (vpage 76).

OFF : Turn “MultEQ XT” equalizer off.

• “Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” and “Audyssey Flat” can be selected after Audyssey Auto Setup has been performed. “Audyssey” is automatically selected after performing Audyssey Auto Setup. When

“Audyssey”, “Audyssey Byp. L/R” or “Audyssey Flat” is selected, illuminates.

• After running Audyssey Auto Setup, if the

Speaker Configuration, Distance, Channel

Level, and Crossover Frequency have changed without increasing the number of speakers measured, only

• Pressing

illuminates.

MULTEQ makes this setting.

NOTE

• “MultEQ XT” and “Manual” cannot be selected when “EQ Customize” is set to “Not Used” (vpage 81).

• When using headphones, “MultEQ XT” is automatically set to “OFF”.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Setting items

Dynamic EQ®

Solve the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Works with

MultEQ XT.

Setting details

ON : Use Dynamic EQ.

OFF : Do not use Dynamic EQ.

• is displayed when set to “ON”.

• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit can be used for operations.

Press DYN EQ/VOL .

Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.

Reference Level Offset

Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content.

Dynamic EQ Reference

Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and

15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard.

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : Heavy

Dynamic EQ : OFF

Dynamic Volume : OFF

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : Medium

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : OFF

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : Light

0dB (Film Ref) : This is the default setting and should be used when listening to movies.

5dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music.

10dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference.

15dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

Setting is enabled when “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” (vpage 74).

74

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 74

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:12

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Setting items

Dynamic Volume®

Solve the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the user’s preferred volume setting.

Setting details

Heavy : Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.

Medium : Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.

Light : Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.

OFF : Do not use “Dynamic Volume”.

• is displayed when set to “ON”.

• If “Dynamic Volume” is set to “Yes” in Auto

Setup (vpage 11), the setting is automatically changed to “Heavy”.

• Buttons on the remote control unit or main unit can be used for operations.

Press DYN EQ/VOL .

Each time DYN EQ/VOL is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : Heavy

Dynamic EQ : OFF

Dynamic Volume : OFF

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : Medium

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : OFF

Dynamic EQ : ON

Dynamic Volume : Light n

A-DSX Soundstage

Adjust Audyssey DSX™ setting and sound stage parameters.

Setting items

Audyssey DSX

Provides more immersive surround sound by adding the new channels.

Default settings are underlined.

Setting details

ON-Height- : Turn on A-DSX processing for height expansion.

ON-Wide- : Turn on A-DSX processing for wide expansion.

OFF : Do not set Audyssey DSX.

• This can also be set by pressing A-DSX .

• The indicator illuminates on the display.

ESPAÑOL

Setting items

Stage Width

Adjust sound stage width when using front wide speakers.

Stage Height

Adjust sound stage height when using front height speakers.

ITALIANO

–10 – +10 (0)

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Audio/Video Adjust

Setting details

–10 – +10 (0)

• “Audyssey DSX” can be set when you are using front height speakers or front wide speakers.

• “Audyssey DSX” is only valid when using a center speaker.

• “Audyssey DSX” is only enabled when the listening mode is set other than STEREO, PLgz Height, MULTI CH STEREO, NEURAL, DOLBY VS,

DIRECT, PURE DIRECT.

• “A-DSX Soundstage” cannot be configured if the HD Audio source being played includes Front height and Front wide channels. In this case, the respective channels are played back using the input signals.

About Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion (A-DSX)

Audyssey DSX is a scalable surround expansion system that adds new channels to improve the surround impression. Based on research in human hearing Audyssey DSX adds a pair of Wide channels in the front because that information is critical in the rendering of a realistic soundstage.

Audyssey DSX then adds a pair of Height channels above the main front channels to reproduce the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues related to soundstage depth. In addition to creating these new channels, Audyssey DSX applies Surround Envelopment

Processing to enhance the blend between the front and side/back surround channels. The result is a much more seamless and enveloping home theater experience.

OFF

Audyssey DSX : ON -Height-

Audyssey DSX : ON -Wide-

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 75

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

75

2010/08/23 18:33:12

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Audio/Video Adjust n

Manual EQ

Default settings are underlined.

Use the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

“Manual EQ” can be set when “MultEQ XT” setting (vpage 74) is “Manual”

Setting items

Adjust CH

Correct the tone of each speaker.

Setting details q Select the speaker tone adjustment method.

All : Adjust the tone of all speakers together.

L/R : Adjust the tone of left and right speakers together.

Each : Adjust the tone of each speaker.

w Select the speaker.

e Select the adjustment frequency band.

63Hz / 125Hz / 250Hz / 500Hz / 1kHz / 2kHz / 4kHz / 8kHz / 16kHz

• Select the speakers you want to adjust when “L/R” or “Each” is selected.

r Adjust the level.

–20.0dB – +6.0dB (0.0dB)

Yes : Copy.

No : Do not copy.

Base Curve Copy

Copy “Audyssey Flat” curve from MultEQ® XT.

Default

The “Manual EQ” settings are returned to the default settings.

“Base Curve Copy” is displayed after Audyssey® Auto Setup has been performed.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n

M-DAX

Default settings are underlined.

Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The M-DAX function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also corrects the sense of volume of the bass to obtain richer sound with compressed audio signals.

Setting details

OFF : Do not use M-DAX.

LOW : Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs.

MID : Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources.

HIGH : Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs.

• This item can be set with analog signals or when a PCM signal (fs = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.

• This cannot be set when the surround mode is set to “DIRECT” or “PURE

DIRECT”.

• This item default setting is “OFF”.

• If a setting other than “OFF” is selected, the M-DAX indicator lights.

• Pressing M-DAX on the remote control unit or the main unit makes this setting.

OFF LOW MID

HIGH n

Audio Delay

While viewing video, manually adjust the time to delay audio output.

Default settings are underlined.

Setting details

0ms – 200ms

• This item can be set within the range of 0 to 100 ms when “Auto Lip Sync” is set to “ON” and when a TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync is connected.

• Store “Audio Delay” for each input source.

• Audio Delay for game mode can be set when “Video Mode” (vpage 70) is set to “Auto” or “Game”.

• This can also be set by pressing A.DELAY

on the remote control unit.

76

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 76

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:13

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Audio/Video Adjust

Picture Adjust

Default settings are underlined.

• This item can be set when the input source is BD DVD VCR SAT GAME AUX1 NET/USB TV .

• With input sources other than the ones above, this item can be set when “Video Select” is selected. In this case, the original input source settings are called out.

• Can be set when the “Video Convert” setting (vpage 70) is “ON”.

• “GAME” or “TV” can be set when “HDMI” (vpage 69) or “Component” (vpage 69) has been assigned.

Setting details Setting items

Contrast

Adjust picture contrast.

Brightness

Adjust picture brightness.

Chroma Level

Adjust picture chroma level

(saturation).

Hue

Adjust color hue.

DNR

Reduce overall picture noise.

Enhancer

Emphasize picture contours.

–6 – +6 (0)

0 – +12

–6 – +6 (0)

–6 – +6 (0)

OFF / Low / Mid / High

0 – +12

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Manual Setup

Set when changing Audyssey® Auto Setup settings, or when changing the audio, video, display or other settings.

If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible

to set MultEQ® XT, Dynamic EQ® and Dynamic Volume® (vpage 74, 75).

Can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.

Menu operation

1 Press mode.

AMP to set the remote control unit to amplifier operation

2 Press MENU .

The menu is displayed on the TV screen.

3 Press ui to select the menu to be set or operated.

4 Press ENTER or p to enter the setting.

• To return to the previous item, press RETURN .

• Exiting the Menu, press MENU while the menu is displayed.

The menu display disappears.

• “DNR” and “Enhancer” are each effective with HDMI output.

• The value set at “Picture Adjust” is stored in the memory individually for each input source.

Items that can be set with the Manual Setup procedure

Speaker Setup (vpage 78) HDMI Setup (vpage 80)

MANUAL SETUP

SPEAKER SETUP

MANUAL SETUP

HDMI SETUP

Audio Setup (vpage 81)

MANUAL SETUP

AUDIO SETUP

Amp Assign

Speaker Config.

Bass Setting

Distance

Channel Level

Crossover Frequency

RGB Range

Auto Lip Sync

HDMI Audio Out

Monitor Out

HDMI Control

Standby Source

Power Off Control

Normal

ON

AMP

Monitor 1

ON

Last

All

7.1ch IN SW Level

EQ Customize

Assign surround back AMP for other use

Network Setup (vpage 81)

MANUAL SETUP

NETWORK SETUP

Network Connecting

Other

Rhapsody Account

Napster Account

Network Information

Make settings for wired LAN

RETURN

Use video range from 16 (black) to 235 (white)

Return

Zone Setup (vpage 83)

MANUAL SETUP

ZONE SETUP

ZONE2 Setup

ZONE3 Setup

Set subwoofer playback level in 7.1ch IN mode

Option Setup (vpage 84)

MANUAL SETUP

OPTION SETUP

Volume Control

Source Delete

GUI

Component 2 Output

Zone Rename

Trigger Out

Display

Setup Lock

Make settings for audio playback in a ZONE2 Make settings for volume control

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 77

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

77

2010/08/23 18:33:13

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Manual Setup

Speaker Setup

Default settings are underlined.

Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey Auto Setup.

• If you change the speaker settings after performing Audyssey Auto Setup, it will not be possible to select

MultEQ XT, Dynamic EQ and Dynamic Volume (vpage 74, 75).

• Manual Setup can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.

n

Audio output from each PRE OUT terminal

PRE OUT Channel

UNBALANCED PRE

OUT terminal

BALANCED PRE

OUT terminal

FL/FR

FL/FR

C

C

SW1/SW2 SL/SR

SW1/SW2 SL/SR

SBL/SBR

SBL/SBR

Audio Output

Surround

Back *

HL/HR

---

Front Height /

Front B

WL/WR

---

Front Wide

*The output audio differs depending on the “Amp Assign” settings.

Setting items

Amp Assign

Set the speakers connected to the UNBALANCED and

BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/

SBR terminals of the power amp.

Speaker Config.

Select speaker configuration and size (bass reproduction capability).

Setting details

Normal : Set when using surround back, front height or front wide speakers.

ZONE2 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE2.

ZONE3 : Set for connecting the speakers for ZONE3.

SPKR-C : Set for connecting the tweeter of the front speaker to the

UNBALANCED and BALANCED PRE OUT SBL/SBR terminals of the power amp, and the woofer of the front speaker to the FL/FR terminals.

Front : Set the front speaker size.

Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.

Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.

NOTE

Do not use the outward shape of the speaker to determine selection of a

“Large” or “Small” speaker.

Instead, use the frequencies set in “Crossover

Frequency” (vpage 80) as the standard for determining bass reproduction capability.

• When “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to

“Large”.

• When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Center”, “Surround“, “S.Back”,

“F.Height” and “F.Wide” can not be set to “Large”.

Center : Set the presence and size of the center speaker.

Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.

Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.

None : Select when a center speaker is not connected.

“Large” is not displayed when “Front” is set to “Small”.

Subwoofer : Set the presence of a subwoofer.

Yes : Use a subwoofer.

No : Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”.

NEDERLANDS

Setting items

Speaker Config.

(Continued)

SVENSKA

Setting details

Surround : Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.

Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.

Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.

None : Select when the surround speakers are not connected.

• When “Surround” is set to “Large”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide” can be set to “Large”.

• When “Surround” is set to “None”, “S.Back”, “F.Height” and “F.Wide” can automatically set to “None”.

S.Back : Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.

Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.

Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.

None : Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.

2spkrs : Use two surround back speakers.

1spkr : Use only one surround back speaker. When you select this setting, connect the surround back speaker to the left (L) channel.

Even when the “S.Back“ setting is other than “None”, sound may not be emitted from the surround back speaker, depending on the playback source.

NOTE

When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you cannot make the “S.Back” setting.

F.Height : Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.

Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.

Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.

None : Select when the front height speakers are not connected.

NOTE

When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you cannot make the “F.Height” setting.

78

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 78 2010/08/23 18:33:13

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Setting items

Speaker Config.

(Continued)

Bass Setting

Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.

Setting details

F.Wide : Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.

Large : Use a large speaker that can adequately play back low frequencies.

Small : Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for low frequencies.

None : Select when the front wide speakers are not connected.

NOTE

When “Amp Assign” setting (vpage 78) is other than “Normal”, you cannot make the “F.Wide” setting.

Subwoofer Mode : Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE : The low range signal of the channel set to “Small” speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

LFE+Main : The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

Distance

Set distance from listening position to speakers.

Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.

• “Subwoofer Mode” can be set when “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer”

(vpage 78) is set to “Yes”.

• Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass.

• Select “LFE+Main” if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

NOTE

If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and

“Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected surround mode.

LPF for LFE : Set LFE signal playback range.

80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz / 250Hz

Unit : Set the unit of distance.

Feet / Meters

Step : Set the minimum variable width of the distance.

1ft / 0.1ft

0.1m / 0.01m

Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / Surround L / Surround R /

S.Back L z / S.Back R z / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L / F.Wide R

: Select the speaker.

z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage 78) is set to

“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.

0.0ft60.0ft / 0.00m18.00m : Set the distance.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Manual Setup

Setting items

Distance

(Continued)

Setting details

• The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the “Amp Assign”

(vpage 78) and “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) settings.

• Default settings :

Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer / F.Height L / F.Height R / F.Wide L /

F.Wide R : 12.0 ft (3.6 m)

Surround L / Surround R / S.Back L / S.Back R : 10.0 ft (3.0 m)

• Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 20 ft (6.0 m).

NOTE

Speakers set to “None” in “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) are not displayed.

Default : The “Distance” settings are returned to the default settings.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

Channel Level

Set the volume of the test tone to be the same when it is output from each speaker.

When you select “Default” and press ENTER , the “Default Setting?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER .

Test Tone Start : Output test tone.

Front L / F.Height L / Center / F.Height R / Front R / F.Wide R /

Surround R / S.Back R z / S.Back L z / Surround L / F.Wide L /

Subwoofer : Select the speaker.

z When the “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” setting (vpage 78) is set to

“1spkr”, “S.Back” is displayed.

–12.0dB – +12.0dB (0.0dB) : Adjust the volume.

• When o is pressed while the subwoofer volume is set to “–12 dB”, the

“Subwoofer” setting switches to “OFF”.

• When “Channel Level” is adjusted, the adjusted values are set for all the surround modes. To adjust the channel level separately for the different surround modes, use the operation see page 56.

• When you press TEST TONE on the remote control unit, you can enter this setting item immediately.

NOTE

• Speakers set to “None” in the “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78) settings are not displayed.

• When a headphones jack is inserted in the PHONES jack of this unit, the

“Channel Level” is not displayed.

Default : The “Channel Level” settings are returned to the default settings.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

When you select “Default” and press ENTER , the “Default Setting?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER .

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

79

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 79 2010/08/23 18:33:14

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Manual Setup

Setting items

Crossover Frequency

Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to the subwoofer. Set the

Crossover Frequency to suit the bass reproduction capability of the speaker being used.

Setting details

Crossover : Set the crossover frequency.

40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /

250Hz

Advanced : Specify crossover frequency for each speaker.

Front / Center / Surround / S.Back / F.Height / F.Wide : Select the speaker.

40Hz / 60Hz / 80Hz / 90Hz / 100Hz / 110Hz / 120Hz / 150Hz / 200Hz /

250Hz : Set the crossover frequency.

• “Crossover Frequency” can be set when the “Bass Setting” –

“Subwoofer Mode” (vpage 79) setting is “LFE+Main”, or when you have a speaker that is set to “Small”.

• Always set the crossover frequency to “80Hz”. When using small speakers, however, we recommend setting the crossover frequency to a higher frequency.

• For speakers set to “Small”, sound below the crossover frequency is cut from the sound output. The cut bass sound is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.

• The speakers that can be set when “Advanced” is selected differ depending on to the “Subwoofer Mode” setting (vpage 79).

• When “LFE” is selected, speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker Config.” can be set. If the speakers are set to “Large”, “Full Band” is displayed and the setting cannot be made.

• If set to “LFE+Main”, this setting can be made regardless of the speaker size.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

HDMI Setup

Default settings are underlined.

Make settings for HDMI video/audio output.

Setting items

RGB Range

Set the video range of RGB output from the HDMI connector.

Auto Lip Sync

Make automatic compensation for timing shift in audio and video output.

HDMI Audio Out

Select HDMI audio output device.

Setting details

Normal : Output with RGB video range (16 (black) to 235 (white)).

Enhanced : Output with RGB video range (0 (black) to 255 (white)).

This setting is active when using a TV equipped with a DVI terminal.

ON : Compensated.

OFF : Not compensated.

AMP : Play back through speakers connected to this unit.

TV : Play back through TV connected to this unit.

Monitor Out

Make settings for HDMI monitor output.

When the HDMI control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting (vpage 55 “HDMI control function”).

Monitor 1 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 terminal is always used.

Monitor 2 : A TV connected to the HDMI OUT 2 terminal is always used.

HDMI Control

You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI

Control.

With “Resolution” (vpage  70) not set to “Auto”, check whether the TV you are using is compatible with the resolution under “HDMI

Information” – “HDMI Monitor 1 Information” and “HDMI Monitor 2

Information” (vpage 88).

ON : Use HDMI control function.

OFF : Do not use HDMI control function.

• When a device that is not compatible with the HDMI control function is connected, set “HDMI Control” to “OFF”.

• Please consult the operating instructions for each connected component to check the settings.

• Refer to “HDMI control function” (vpage 55) for more information about the HDMI control function.

NOTE

When “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”, it consumes more standby

power. If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

• “HDMI Control” does not work when the power to the equipment is off.

Either turn power on or set to standby.

• The HDMI control function controls operations of a TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function. Make sure that the TV and HDMI are connected when you perform HDMI control.

• If the “HDMI Control” settings have been changed, always reset the power to connected devices after the change.

80

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 80 2010/08/23 18:33:14

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Manual Setup

Default settings are underlined.

Setting items

Standby Source

Sets the HDMI input source to put into standby when the power is on.

Setting details

Last : This item is set at the last-used input source.

HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4 / HDMI5 / HDMI6 : Put the respective input source into standby.

Power Off Control

Links the power standby of this unit to external equipment.

“Standby Source” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.

All : If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.

Video : If power to a connected TV is turned off when the input source is BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / TV, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.

OFF : This unit does not link with power to a TV.

“Power Off Control” can be set when “HDMI Control” is set to “ON”.

Network Setup

Make network settings.

Setting items

Network Connecting

Make settings for wired

LAN.

Audio Setup

Default settings are underlined.

Make settings for audio playback.

Setting items

7.1ch IN SW Level

Setup playback method for analog signals inputted from

7.1CH INPUT connectors.

EQ Customize

Set so that unused equalizer settings are not displayed when MULTEQ is pressed.

Setting details

Subwoofer Level : Set playback level of subwoofer signal input from the

7.1CH INPUT connector.

+10dB : This is the recommended level.

+15dB / +5dB / 0dB : Select the level according to the player being used.

Audyssey Byp. L/R : Set when not using “Audyssey Byp. L/R” equalizer.

Used : Use.

Not Used : Do not use.

Set so that “Audyssey Byp. L/R” settings can be made when

Audyssey® Auto Setup is performed.

Audyssey Flat : Set when not using “Audyssey Flat” equalizer.

Used : Use.

Not Used : Do not use.

Set so that “Audyssey Flat” settings can be made when Audyssey

Auto Setup is performed.

Manual : Set when not using the “Manual” equalizer.

Used : Use.

Not Used : Do not use.

Setting details

1. Connect the LAN cable (vpage 24 “Connecting to a home network

(LAN)”).

2. Turn on this unit (vpage 7 “Turn on power”).

This unit performs automatic network setup due to the DHCP function.

When connecting to a network that has no DHCP function, perform the setting in step 3.

3. Set the IP address at the “Network Connecting”.

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP

NETWORK CONNECTING

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP

NETWORK CONNECTING w

DHCP OFF

IP Address 192.168.100.19

Exit

Detail

ENTER Enter

Set IP address and proxy manually q

RETURN Return

DHCP OFF

IP Address [192.168.100.019]

Subnet Mask [255.255.255.000]

Default Gateway [000.000.000.000]

Primary DNS [000.000.000.000]

Secondary DNS [000.000.000.000]

Proxy

Exit r e

RETURN Return

Set IP address manually q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press

ENTER .

w Use o p to set “DHCP” to “OFF”, then press i .

The DHCP function is disabled.

e Use uip to input the address and press ENTER .

IP Address : Set the IP address within the ranges shown below.

The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.

CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255

CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255

CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255

Subnet Mask : When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input

255.255.255.0.

Default Gateway : When connected to a gateway (router), input its

IP address.

Primary DNS, Secondary DNS : If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at

“Primary DNS”. If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the first one at “Secondary DNS”.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 81

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

81

2010/08/23 18:33:14

ENGLISH

Manual Setup

Setting items

Network Connecting

(Continued)

DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Setting details r Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER .

Setup is complete.

• When connecting to the network via a Proxy server, select “Proxy” and press ENTER (vpage 82 “Proxy settings”).

• If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need to make the settings at “IP Address” and “Proxy”, since the DHCP function is set to “ON” in this unit’s default settings.

• If this unit is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some knowledge of networks is required. For details, consult a network administrator.

• If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings (vpage 24).

• If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP

(Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

• When you want to cancel the setting during IP address input, press

RETURN .

Proxy settings : Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP

NETWORK CONNECTING

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP

NETWORK CONNECTING

DHCP ON

IP Address 192.168.100.19

Exit

Detail

ENTER Enter

Set IP address and proxy manually q

RETURN Return

MANUAL SETUP NETWORK SETUP

NETWORK CONNECTING e

DHCP ON

IP Address [192.168.100.019]

Subnet Mask [255.255.255.000]

Default gateway [000.000.000.000]

Primary DNS [000.000.000.000]

Secondary DNS [000.000.000.000]

Proxy w

Exit

ENTER

Set if using proxy server

Enter RETURN Return

Proxy ON r

Address [000.000.000.000] y t

Exit u

RETURN Return

Proxy server is used q On the menu, select “Network Connecting” – “Detail” and press

ENTER .

w Use ui to set “Proxy” and press ENTER .

e Use o p to set “Proxy” to “ON” and press i .

The proxy server is enabled.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Setting items

Network Connecting

(Continued)

Other

Network function on/off setting during standby, and

PC language setting.

Setting details r Use o p to select the proxy server input method, and then press i .

Address : Select when inputting by address.

Name : Select when inputting by domain name.

t Use uio p to input the proxy server address or domain name and press ENTER .

When “Address” is selected in step r : Input the address

When“Name” is selected in step r : Input the domain name

• For character input, see page 65.

y Use uio p to input the proxy server port number and press ENTER .

u Use i to select “Exit” and press ENTER .

Setup is complete.

Network Standby : Set the network function on/off during standby.

ON : Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.

OFF : Suspend network function during standby.

Set to “ON” when using the web control function.

PC Language : Select computer environment language.

ara / chi (smpl) / chi (trad) / cze / dan / dut / eng / fin / fre / ger / gre /

heb / hun / ita / jpn / kor / nor / pol / por / por(BR) / rus / spa / swe / tur

Friendly Name Edit : The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. Up to 63 characters can be input. The default Friendly

Name on first use is “marantz:[AV7005]”.

• For character input, see page 65.

Default : Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

When you select “Default” and press ENTER , the “Default Setting?” prompt is displayed. Select either “Yes” or “No”, and press ENTER .

82

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 82

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:15

Setting items

Other

(Continued)

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Setting details

Update Notification : Displays a notification message on this unit’s menu screen when the latest firmware is released with “Firmware Update”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 24) when using this function.

ON : Display update message.

OFF : Do not display update message.

• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the “Check for Update” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more information on “Firmware Update”)

• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.

Upgrade Notification : Display a notification message on this unit’s menu screen when downloadable firmware is released with “Add New

Feature”. The notification message is displayed for about 20 seconds when the power is turned on. Connect to broadband Internet (vpage 24) when using this function.

ON : Display upgrade message.

OFF : Do not display upgrade message.

Rhapsody Account

Set or change Username and Password (vpage 42

“Listening to Rhapsody”).

Napster Account

Set or change Username and Password (vpage 39

“Listening to Napster”).

Network Information

Display network information.

• When you press ENTER during display of the notification message, the “Add New Feature” screen is displayed. (Refer to page 86 for more information on “Add New Feature”)

• Press RETURN to erase the notification message.

Username / Password / Account Number / Merge / Clear

• For character input, see page 65.

Username / Password

• For character input, see page 65.

Friendly Name / DHCP= ON/OFF / IP Address / MAC Address

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Manual Setup

Zone Setup

Default settings are underlined.

Set the audio to play back with multi-zone (ZONE2, ZONE3).

Setting items

Bass

Adjust low frequency range

(bass).

Treble

Adjust high frequency range

(treble).

HPF

Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass.

Level Lch

Adjust the left channel output level.

Level Rch

Adjust the right channel output level.

Channel

Set the signal output from multi-zone.

Volume Level

Set the volume output level.

–10dB – +10dB (0dB)

–10dB – +10dB (0dB)

ON : The low range is attenuated.

OFF : The low range is not attenuated.

–12dB – +12dB (0dB)

“Stereo“.

Setting details

The “Level Lch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 83) is set to

“Stereo“.

–12dB – +12dB (0dB)

The “Level Rch” can be set when “Channel“ (vpage 83) is set to

Stereo : Select stereo output.

Mono : Select mono output.

Variable : Volume adjustment is enabled by main unit and remote control unit.

–40dB (41) : Fix volume at –40 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier.

0dB (81) : Fix volume at 0 dB. Set when adjusting volume by external amplifier.

Volume Limit

Make a setting for maximum volume.

When “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”, the

“Volume Level” setting is automatically set to “Variable”.

OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.

–20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)

• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 83) is “Variable”.

• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage 84) is set to “Absolute”.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 83

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

83

2010/08/23 18:33:15

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Manual Setup

Setting items

Power On Level

Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Mute Level

Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Setting details

Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.

– – – (0) : Always mute when power is turned on.

–80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.

• This can be set when the multi-zone “Volume Level” setting (vpage 83) is “Variable”.

• This is displayed from 0 to 99 when “Volume Display” (vpage 84) is set to “Absolute”.

Full : The sound is muted entirely.

–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.

–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Option Setup

Default settings are underlined.

Make various other settings.

Setting items

Volume Control

Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

Setting details

Volume Display : Set how volume is displayed.

Relative : Display ---dB (Min), in the range –80.5 dB – 18 dB.

Absolute : Display in the range 0 (Min) – 99.

Source Delete

Remove from the display input sources that are not used.

GUI

Make the settings related to displays on the TV screen.

• The “Volume Display” setting is applied also to the “Volume Limit” and

“Power On Level” display method.

• The “Volume Display” setting applies to all zones.

Volume Limit : Make a setting for maximum volume.

OFF : Do not set a maximum volume.

–20dB (61) / –10dB (71) / 0dB (81)

Power On Level : Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on.

Last : Use the memorized setting from the last session.

– – – (0) : Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.

–80dB – 18dB (1 – 99) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.

Mute Level : Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on.

Full : The sound is muted entirely.

–40dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down.

–20dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

BD / DVD / VCR / SAT / GAME / AUX1 / NET/USB /

TV / CD / CDR / PHONO / SIRIUS / HD Radio /

M-XPort : Select input source that is not used.

ON : Use this source.

Delete : Do not use this source.

NOTE

• Input sources being used in the various zones cannot be deleted.

• Input sources set to “Delete” cannot be selected using SOURCE SEL .

Screensaver : Make screensaver settings.

ON : The screensaver is activated during menu display, NET/USB, iPod,

SIRIUS or HD Radio screen display if no operation is performed for an approximately 3-minute continuous period. When you press uio p , the screensaver is cancelled and the screen before that screen saver started is displayed.

OFF : Screensaver is not activated.

84

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 84

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:15

Setting items

GUI

(Continued)

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Setting details

Wall Paper : Set wallpaper to display in the background when playback is stopped, etc.

Picture : Set the background to a picture (Marantz logo).

Black : Set the background to black.

Format : Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

NTSC : Select NTSC output.

PAL : Select PAL output.

“Format” can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed.

1. Press and hold the main unit’s and RETURN

A-DSX

for at least 3 seconds.

“Video Format” appears on the display.

2. Press o format.

p and set the video signal

3. Press the main unit’s or

ENTER , MENU

RETURN to complete the setting.

NOTE

When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the picture will not be displayed properly.

Text : Display the details of operation when switching surround mode, input mode, etc.

ON : Turn display on.

OFF : Turn display off.

Master Volume : Display the master volume during adjustment.

Bottom : Display at the bottom.

Top : Display at the top.

OFF : Turn display off.

When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed on movie subtitles, set to “Top”.

NET/USB : Set the NET/USB screen display time when the input source is “NET/USB”.

Always : Show display continuously.

30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.

OFF : Turn display off.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Manual Setup

GUI

Setting items

(Continued)

Component 2 Output

Set whether to use the component 2 output terminal as MAIN ZONE or

ZONE2.

Zone Rename

Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer.

Trigger Out

Select the condition for activating Trigger Out 1/2 for the input source, surround mode, etc.

See “DC OUT (TRIGGER

OUT) jacks” (vpage 54) for more information on trigger out.

Setting details

TUNER : Set the tuner screen display time when the input source is

“SIRIUS” or “HD Radio”.

Always : Show display continuously.

30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.

OFF : Turn display off.

iPod : Set the iPod screen display time when the input source is “NET/

USB”.

Always : Show display continuously.

30sec : Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

10sec : Show display for 10 seconds after operation.

OFF : Turn display off.

MAIN ZONE : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output for MAIN ZONE.

ZONE2 : Use the component 2 output terminal as a monitor output for

ZONE2.

• Up to 10 characters can be input.

• For character input, see page 65.

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3)

Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to “ON”.

n When setting for input source

Activate trigger out when the input source set to “ON” is selected.

Active for the zone set to “ON” with “When Setting for Zone”.

n When setting for HDMI monitor

Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to “ON” is selected.

Active when the “MAIN ZONE” set to “ON” with “When Setting for Zone” is selected, and when the input source set to “ON” with

“When Setting for Input Source” is selected.

ON : Activate trigger on this mode.

– – – : Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Default : The “Trigger Out” settings are returned to the default settings.

Yes : Reset to the defaults.

No : Do not reset to the defaults.

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 85

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

85

2010/08/23 18:33:15

ENGLISH

Manual Setup

Setting items

Display

Set the display on/off setting.

DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Setting details

ON : Display is always on.

Display Auto OFF : Display is off except when showing the status display.

Display OFF : Display is always off.

This can also be set by pressing

DISPLAY .

Each time DISPLAY is pressed, the setting is changed as shown below.

ON Display Auto Off

Display OFF

ESPAÑOL

Setup Lock

Protect settings from inadvertent change.

ON : Turn protection on.

OFF : Turn protection off.

When canceling the setting, set “Setup Lock” to “OFF”.

NOTE

When “Setup Lock” is set to “ON”, the settings listed below can no longer be changed. Also, “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed if you attempt to operate related settings.

· Menu operations

· M-DAX

· Dynamic Volume®

· Channel Level

· MultEQ® XT

· Dynamic EQ®

Maintenance Mode

Use when receiving maintenance from a Marantz service engineer or custom installer.

NOTE

Only use this function if so instructed by a Marantz serviceperson or installer.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Setting items

Firmware Update

Update the firmware of this unit.

Setting details

Check for Update : Check for firmware updates. You can also check approximately how long it will take to complete an update.

Start : Execute the update process.

When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed.

When updating is complete, the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed.

Add New Feature

Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an update.

• If updating fails, the set automatically retries, but if updating is still not possible, one of the messages shown below is displayed. If the display reads as shown below, check the settings and network environment, then update again.

Display

Updating fail

Login failed

Server is busy

Connection fail

Download fail

Description

Updating failed.

Failure to log into server.

Server is busy. Wait a while then try again.

Failure in connecting to server.

Downloading of the firmware has failed.

Upgrade : Execute the upgrade process.

When updating starts, the power indicator becomes red and the menu screen is shut down. The amount of update time which has elapsed is displayed.

When upgrading is complete, the power indicator becomes green and normal status is resumed.

• If the upgrade is not successful, an error message identical to those in

“Firmware Update” will appear on the display. Check the settings and network environment, then update again.

Upgrade Status : Display a list of the additional functions provided by the upgrade.

See the Marantz website for details about updates.

When the procedure is complete, “Registered” is displayed in this menu and updates can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, “Not Registered” is displayed.

The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure.

The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding o and RETURN for at least 3 seconds.

86

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 86

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:16

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Manual Setup

Notes concerning use of “Firmware Update” and “Add New Feature”

• In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system requirements and settings for a broadband Internet connection (vpage 24).

• Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrating is completed.

• Even with a broadband connection to the Internet, approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/ upgrading procedure to be completed.

• Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot be performed until updating/ upgrading is completed.

• Furthermore, updating/upgrading the firmware may reset the backup data for the parameters, etc. set for this unit.

• The following backup data may be erased after an update or upgrade.

• Internet radio preset channel

• Internet radio Recently Played data

• Username registered for Flickr Contact

• Data in Internet radio, media server and USB memory device

• If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the ON/STANDBY on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. “Update retry” appears on the display and update restarts from the point at which update failed. If the error continues despite this, check the network environment.

• Information regarding the “Firmware Update” function and “Add New Feature” will be announced on the Marantz web site each time related plans are defined.

• When usable new firmware is released with “Firmware Update” or “Add New Feature”, a notification message is displayed on the menu screen. When you do not want to be notified, set “Update Notification”

(vpage 83) and “Upgrade Notification” (vpage 83) to “OFF”.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 87

Remote control operation buttons

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

87

2010/08/23 18:33:16

ENGLISH

Information

DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

Items

Status

Show information about current settings.

Audio Input Signal

Show information about audio input signals.

Setting details n MAIN ZONE

This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE.

The information displayed differs according to the input source.

Select Source / Name / Surround Mode / Input Mode /

Decode Mode / HDMI / Digital / Component / Video Select /

Video Mode / Content Type / Video Convert / i/p Scaler /

Resolution / Progressive Mode / Aspect etc.

n ZONE2

This item shows information about settings for ZONE2.

Power / Select Source / Volume Level n ZONE3

This item shows information about settings for ZONE3.

Power / Select Source / Volume Level

Surround Mode : The currently set surround mode.

Signal : The input signal type.

fs : The input signal’s sampling frequency.

Format : The number of channels in the input signal (front, surround, LFE).

Offset : The dialogue normalization correction value.

Flag : This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel. “MATRIX” is displayed with Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Matrix signals, “DISCRETE” with DTS-ES Discrete signals.

Dialogue normalization function

This function is automatically activated when playing Dolby Digital sources.

It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources.

The correction value can be checked using the STATUS .

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Items

HDMI Information

Show information about

HDMI input/output signals and monitor.

Preset Channel

Show information about preset channels.

NET/USB SIRIUS

HD Radio

Setting details

HDMI Signal Information

Resolution / Color Space / Pixel Depth

HDMI Monitor 1 Information / HDMI Monitor 2 Information

Interface / Supported resol.

“HDMI Monitor 1 Information” or “HDMI Monitor 2 Information” displays information on the HDMI monitor currently being used.

A / B / C / D / E / F / G

A1 – A8 / B1 – B8 / C1 – C8 / D1 – D8 / E1 – E8 / F1 – F8 / G1 – G8

The figure is the corrected value.

This cannot be changed.

88

Remote control operation buttons

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 88

Move the cursor

(Up/Down/Left/Right)

Confirm the setting Return to previous menu

2010/08/23 18:33:16

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Other settings

Remote control settings

• When you connect a remote control receiver unit (purchased separately) to the REMOTE CONTROL IN terminal of this unit, use the following procedure to disable the remote sensor function of this unit.

• The remote sensor function of remote control signals is enabled by default.

ON/STANDBY

Switches light illumination on/off

You can switch the lighting around the main display on or off.

• The factory setting is “ON”.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

DISPLAY

STATUS ENTER n

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit

When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/

STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on the main unit.

“Remote Lock:ON” is shown on the display, and the infrared light receiving function is disabled.

Press and hold DISPLAY on the main unit for 3 seconds.

• Carry out the same procedure if you want to change the settings again. n

Enabling the remote sensor function

When the main unit is in standby mode, press ON/

STANDBY while holding down STATUS and ENTER on the main unit.

The infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

NOTE

If a remote control receiver unit (purchased separately) is not connected, do not perform this setting. If you do, you will not be able to operate this unit using the remote control unit.

89

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 89 2010/08/23 18:33:16

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Operating the connected devices by remote control unit

Registering the supplied preset codes in the remote control unit enables you to operate devices made by other manufacturers.

Operating AV equipment

1 Press the input source select

button (vpage 25).

The remote control operating mode switches as shown in the table below, and the mode name is shown in the remote control display.

NOTE

Press the input source select buttons once to switch the operation mode of the remote control unit supplied with this unit.

Press the input source select buttons twice consecutively to switch the operation mode of the remote control unit and input source of this unit.

Input source select buttons z

Input source of this unit

Devices controllable with the remote control unit

(Operation mode)

BD Device registered on the BD button z DVD

VCR

Device registered on the DVD button

Device registered on the VCR button z SAT

GAME

Device registered on the SAT button

Device registered on the GAME button z z

AUX1

NET/USB

TV

CD

CDR

SIRIUS

Device registered on the AUX1 button

• Network function

• iPod or USB memory device connected to the USB port

Device registered on the TV button

Device registered on the CD button

Device registered on the CDR button

SIRIUS Satellite Radio

HD Radio HD Radio receiver

M-XPort Device registered on the M-XP button z If a preset code is registered for this button, the remote control unit of this unit can control another devices.

NOTE

If the mode of the remote control unit is set to other than ampoperation mode, press AMP to switch the remote control unit to the amp-operation mode to perform the following operations:

• For menu operation by pressing MENU

• For setting the channel level of the unit by pressing CH LVL

• For performing direct playback

• For switching Audyssey DSX™, MultEQ XT®, Dynamic EQ® and

Dynamic Volume® settings.

• For using the Video Select function.

• For using the sleep timer function.

• For displaying the Source Select screen.

• For switching the M-DAX function.

• For directly selecting “AUTO” and “STEREO” of the listening modes .

2 Operate this unit or the device whose input source is switched.

• For details, refer to the operating instructions for each device.

For operations of iPod and HD Radio receiver, see the following pages.

• iPod (vpage 28)

• HD Radio receiver (vpage 34)

90

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 90 2010/08/23 18:33:17

Registering preset codes

When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players or TVs made by different manufacturers.

NOTE

• No preset codes other than registered.

BD , DVD , TV , SAT and CD can be

• In the factory settings, remote control codes for all Marantz products are registered. n

Buttons used for operating the devices

q

SOURCE ON/OFF w e

For switching power of each device on or off.

uio p , ENTER

For menu operation of each device.

MENU , SETUP , TOP MENU

For displaying the menu of each device.

r 1 , 2 , 3 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 t Number button ( 0 – 9 , +10 ) y u

PRESET + , PRESET –

TV POWER , TV INPUT

For operating a TV .

This button is enabled in any mode.

For details on operation with the remote control unit, see pages

28 – 43, 92.

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Registering preset codes

The following two methods can be used for registering the reset code. q Entering a 4-digit code w Scanning the code table

Entering a 4-digit code

See the preset code list table for the code to be input.

1 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for the appliance to control, and press

SET until indicator blinks twice.

The back light flashes.

2 Press the 4-digit code for the appliance using the numeric buttons (code table at the end of this book).

• The 4-digit code is shown in the remote control display.

• When the settings are complete, “OK” is shown in the remote control display.

• If “NG” is displayed in the remote control display, repeat steps 1 and 2, and enter the same code again.

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH

1 Switch the power on of the device for which you want to set the preset code.

2 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for the appliance to control, and press

SET until indicator blinks twice.

The back light flashes.

3 Aim the remote control at the appliance and slowly alternate between pressing and appliance.

INPUT

SOURCE ON/OFF

d

for the

The preset code is shown in the remote control display.

4 Stop when the appliance turns off.

5 Press ENTER once to lock in the code.

Check the registered preset code

1 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for appliance to control, and press

SET until indicator blinks twice and back light flashes.

The back light flashes.

2 Press SEARCH/INFO .

The display flashes twice, after which the set code is shown for 3 seconds in the remote control display.

ENGLISH

91

2010/08/23 18:33:17 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 91

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Registering preset codes

Default settings for preset codes

The devices shown below are registered for each input source button as default. Settings can be changed according to the devices to be used.

1 Press and hold down the input source select buttons for appliance to control and press

SET until indicator blinks twice.

The back light flashes.

2 Enter the appropriate preset code

(4 digits) from the table below.

The display flashes twice.

Input source select buttons

Category

Preset code

Blu-ray Disc player

DVD player

5000

2000

Television

Satellite set top box

CD player

1000

4000

3000

NOTE

After this procedure, the selected source reset to its initial code.

FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Operating components

The supplied remote control unit can control a component other than this unit.

1 Switch the input source

(vpage 25).

2 Operate the component.

• For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

n

Blu-ray Disc player / HD-DVD player /

DVD player / DVD recorder operation

Operation buttons

SOURCE ON/OFF

MENU

TOP MENU uio p

ENTER

6 7

1

8 9

3

2

0 – 9

CLR

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Function

Power on/standby

(Popup) Menu

Top menu

Cursor operation

Enter

Manual search

(fast-reverse/fast-forward)

Playback

Auto search (cue)

Pause

Stop

Select title, chapter or channel selection

Clear the inputting

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz) n

CD player / CD recorder operation

Operation buttons

SOURCE ON/OFF

6 7

1

8 9

3

2

CLR

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Function

Power on/off

Manual search

(fast-reverse/fast-forward)

Playback

Auto search (cue)

Pause

Stop

Clear the inputting

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz) n

TV operation

Operation buttons

SOURCE ON/OFF

CHANNEL +, –

CLR

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Function

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch channels (up/down)

Clear the inputting

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz)

92

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 92 2010/08/23 18:33:18

Operating components n

Set top box for satellite (SAT) operation

Operation buttons

SOURCE ON/OFF

CHANNEL +, – uio p

ENTER

0 – 9

CLR

TV POWER

TV INPUT

Function

Power on/standby

Switch channels (up/down)

Cursor operation

Enter

Channel selection

Clear the inputting

TV power on/standby

(Default : Marantz)

Switch TV input

(Default : Marantz)

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

Operating learn function

• If the AV device is not a Marantz device, or if the device does not operate even when the preset code is registered, use the learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be remembered for use by the Marantz remote control included with this device.

• This remote control unit is capable of learning around 160 codes.

Remembering remote control codes from other devices

1 Place the Marantz remote control and remote control from the other device approximately 5 cm apart, with the remote control signal transmission sections facing each other.

5 cm

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

5 Press and hold the button that you want to register on the other remote control until “OK” is displayed on the Marantz remote control display.

• If “NG” is shown on the remote control display, perform step 5 again. If “NG” is shown again on the remote control display, the remote control may not be able to learn the code correctly. In this case, use the specialized remote control for the device.

• If the remote control memory becomes full, “FULL” is shown on the remote control display. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons for the same input source.

7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other input sources.

8 When programming of the remote control unit is completed, press SET .

The LEARN display disappears, and the remote control unit exits learn mode.

2

3

Press and hold down SET and

SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.

Press input source select buttons to select the input source.

The input source is shown in the remote control display.

4 Select the button to be learned.

LEARN indicator lights up.

NOTE

• The learning function is unavailable for all SOURCE ON/OFF , MACRO and HDMI in any mode.

• The learning function is unavailable for all buttons in TUNER mode,

AMP mode, NET/USB mode and M-XP mode.

• The learning procedure does not operate correctly if the batteries have become worn.

• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the

LEARN mode, the remote control unit automatically exits from the

LEARN mode.

93

2010/08/23 18:33:20 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 93

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

1 Press and hold down SET and

SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.

2 Press input source select buttons to select the input source you want to delete.

The input source is shown in the remote control display.

3 Press and hold down HDMI and press the learned button to be erased twice.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display, and the mode returns to learning mode.

• To return the normal mode, press SET .

FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Operating learn function

Delete saved remote control codes

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all memory contents.

n

Delete remote control codes for each button

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS n

Delete remote control codes for all input sources

1 Press and hold down SET and

SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.

2 Press and hold down HDMI press ON and STANDBY

LEARN indicator lights.

.

and

3 Press ENTER to continue erasing.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display, and the mode returns to learning mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER and simply press any other button.

• To return the normal mode, press SET .

SVENSKA

NOTE

Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave empty if the button has no factory preset code.

n

Delete remote control codes for each input source

1 Press and hold down SET and

SOURCE SEL until the LEARN indicator blinks.

2 Press and hold down HDMI and press the learned input source select buttons to be erased twice.

“ERASE” is shown in the remote control display.

3 Press ENTER to continue erasing.

The indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER , and simply press any other button.

• To return the normal mode, press SET .

94

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 94 2010/08/23 18:33:20

Operating macro function

• When the macro function is used, operations that usually require a complicated series of multiple button operations can be performed easily just by pressing the MACRO button.

• This device can remember up to 6 macro functions.

• Each macro can record a maximum of 10 steps.

[Example] To playback a DVD q Turn this unit’s power on

↓ w Switch this unit's input source to DVD

↓ e Turn the TV’s power on

↓ r DVD Playback

Recording macro operations

[Example] Recording DVD playback operations to the number “1” button

1 Press and hold SET and MACRO together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,

MACRO indicator and remote control display.

2 Press the macro operation number (“ record to.

1 ”) that you want to

“M1-01” is shown in the remote control display.

• If the number that you want to record to has already been recorded to, the recorded number flashes in the display.

3 Press the input source switch button (“ DVD ”) of the operation that you want to record along with the command button (“ 1 ”).

The macro operation step number is shown in the remote control display.

• To record the amp input source, press input source switching button.

AMP first, followed by the

SVENSKA

4

NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO

When the macro operation recording is complete, press and hold ENTER until the LEARN indicator and MACRO indicator switch off.

NOTE

The RETURN , uio p, ENTER , VOLUME + , – and CLR buttons cannot be recorded as macro operations.

Checking recorded macro operations

[Example] Checking the recorded macro operations to button “ 1 ”

1 Press and hold MACRO and

MENU together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,

MACRO indicator and remote control display.

2 Press the number button (“ 1 ”) that you want to check.

The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator and “M1-01” flashes in the remote control display.

3 Press the VOLUME +, – .

• The LEARN indicator switches off, and “M1-01” is shown in the remote control display.

• The recorded macro operation is performed.

4 Repeat step 3 until the final number of the macro operation is displayed.

• The display returns to that of step 1.

• When the macro operation number is displayed, the corresponding macro operation is performed.

5 When the macro operation check is complete, press and hold off.

ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches

FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Editing recorded macro operations

[Example] Changing macro operation “

1 ” recorded on number button

1 ” to “ 3 ”, and changing the number button to“ 2 ”

1 Press and hold MACRO and

MENU together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,

MACRO indicator and remote control display.

2 Press the number button (“ 1 ”) that you want to change.

The LEARN indicator, MACRO indicator and “M1-01” flashes in the remote control display.

3 Press ui to select the macro operation button (“ 2 ”) to edit.

After the macro operation button is displayed, the recorded operation is performed.

• When the macro operation is updated as a recorded step, press the input source switching button, and then press the new step button (“ 2 ”).

• To insert a new macro operation between recorded steps, after performing step 3, press button (“ 2 ”).

MEMORY and then press the new step

When a new step is introduced, if the total number of steps is already 10, the 10th step is deleted after the new step is introduced.

• To delete recorded macro operations, after step 3, call the step number that you want to delete, and press CLR .

• To return to step 1, press ENTER .

4 When the macro operation edit is complete, press and hold ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.

95

2010/08/23 18:33:21 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 95

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Operating macro function

Using macro operations

[Example] Using the recorded macro operations to button “ 1 ”

1

Press the MACRO.

“MACRO” is shown in the MACRO indicator and remote control display.

2 Press the number button (“ 1 ”) that you want to use.

Macro operations recorded to number button “ 1 ” are performed one at a time.

• The step number shown in the remote control display disappears after the step is performed.

• When all macro operations are completed, the remote control returns to the amp operation mode.

FRANÇAIS

Deleting recorded macro operations

[Example] Deleting the macro operations recorded to button“ 2 ”

1 Press and hold MACRO and

MENU together until “MACRO” flashes in the LEARN indicator,

MACRO indicator and remote control display.

2 Press and hold CLR and the number ( “2” ) that you want to delete for approximately 3 seconds.

“M2-CL” flashes in the remote control display.

3 Press the ENTER .

The recorded macro operation is deleted, and the remote control returns to step 1.

• To cancel the macro delete operation, press a different button without pressing ENTER .

4 When the macro operation delete is complete, press and hold switches off.

ENTER until the MACRO indicator

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

Adjusting the interval time of macro operations transmitting

The macro operation transmission interval can be adjusted.

• The factory setting is “1 second”.

1 Press and hold MACRO and

SOURCE SEL until “SETUP” is shown in the remote control display.

“SETUP” is shown for 3 seconds in the remote control display, after which

“MCR05z” is displayed. z The current transmission interval is shown.

2 Press o interval.

p to change to the desired transmission

• The interval time can be changed from 0.5 to 5 seconds by 0.5 seconds step.

3 When the adjustment is complete, press and hold

ENTER until the MACRO indicator switches off.

SVENSKA

Setting the back light

Press the Light button on the side of the remote control, and the buttons on the remote control light for 2 seconds. If the Light button is pressed while the buttons are lit, the buttons remain lit for another

2 seconds.

• Backlight is set on in the factory settings. n

Disabling the backlight

Press and hold both SET and

STANDBY until indicator flashes twice. n

Turning the backlight on

Press and hold both SET and until indicator flashes twice.

ON

96

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 96 2010/08/23 18:33:21

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 97

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS

Information

Information

Here, we list various information related to this unit.

Please refer to this information as needed.

DEUTSCH ENGLISH

F

Part names and functions vpage 98

F

Other information vpage 103

F

Troubleshooting vpage 112

F

Specifications vpage 116

F

Index vpage 117

2010/08/23 18:33:22

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Part names and functions

ITALIANO

Front panel

For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

G With the door openH

W2 W1 W0 Q9 Q8 u y t r

Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4

W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 E0 E1 E2 E3 i o Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 q w e q Power operation button

(ON/STANDBY) ······································ (7, 12)

Turns power to this unit on and off (standby).

w Power indicator ·········································· (12) e Door

When you are using buttons and/or terminals behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. When not using buttons and/or terminals behind the door, close it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door.

r VOLUME control knob ······························· (26) t Remote control sensor ···························· (102) y Main display ················································ (99) u INPUT SELECTOR knob ····························· (25) i Headphones jack

When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.

NOTE

To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using headphones.

o SETUP MIC jack ······································ (9, 52)

Q0 iPod/USB port ············································ (20)

Q1 HDMI connector ·········································· (16)

Q2 DIGITAL connector ····································· (19)

Q3 AUX1 INPUT connectors ··························· (19)

Q4 RETURN button ·································· (64 – 66)

Q5 ENTER button ····································· (64 – 66)

Q6 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·················· (64 – 66)

Q7 MENU button ·············································· (66)

Q8 Sub display ················································· (99)

Q9 Audyssey DSX™ button (A-DSX) ············· (75)

W0 M-DAX button / indicator ·························· (76)

W1 PURE DIRECT button / indicator ··············· (46)

W2 Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® button

(DYNAMIC EQ/VOL) ··································· (74)

W3 SURROUND MODE button ························ (44)

W4 AUTO button ································ (44, 60, 115)

W5 DISPLAY button ···································· (60, 86)

W6 STATUS button ·········································· (88)

W7 Speaker A/B switching button

(SPKR A/B) ·················································· (26)

W8 HDMI OUT button ······································ (16)

W9 ZONE SELECT button ································ (62)

E0 ZONE2 ON/OFF button ······························ (62)

E1 ZONE3 ON/OFF button ······························ (62)

E2 SLEEP button ·············································· (56)

E3 BAND button ·············································· (32)

98

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 98 2010/08/23 18:33:22

Display

Main Display

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL

Sub Display

Q6 Q5

ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH

Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 Q0 o i u r

ENGLISH q w e r t y q w e q Light illumination

When the power to this device is switched on, the surrounding area is lit blue. The settings can be changed so the light does not switch on (vpage 89 “Switches light illumination on/off”).

w Master volume indicator e Input source indicator

The currently selected input source name is displayed.

If the input source name has been changed using “Input Setup” –

“Rename” (vpage 71) in the menu, the input source name after the change is displayed.

q Input signal indicators w Input signal channel indicators

These light when digital signals are input.

When playing HD Audio sources, the indicator lights when a signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front, center, surround, surround back or LFE channel) is input.

If there are two or more extension channels, the indicators light.

and e Information display

The input source name, surround mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.

r Surround back/front height/front wide channel indicators

When audio is output from the surround back channels, the “SB”,

“SBL” or “SBR” indicator lights. When audio is output from the front height channels, the “H” indicator lights. When audio is output from the front wide channels, the “W” indicator lights.

t Front speaker indicator

This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.

y Monitor output indicator

These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting.

u Master volume indicator i MUTE indicator

This lights when the mute mode is select (vpage 26).

o AUDYSSEY indicators

Lighting is as follows, depending on the setting of “Dynamic EQ®”

(vpage 74) and “Dynamic Volume®” (vpage 75).

When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are

“ON”.

When “Dynamic EQ” is “ON” and “Dynamic

Volume” is “OFF”.

When “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” are

“OFF”.

Q0 Sleep timer indicator

This lights when the sleep mode is selected (vpage 56).

Q1 Multi-zone indicators

This lights up when ZONE2, ZONE3 (separate room) power is turned on (vpage 62).

Q2 Input mode indicators

Set the audio input modes for the different input sources (vpage 71).

Q3 HDMI indicator

This lights when playing using HDMI connections.

Q4 Tuner reception mode indicators

These light according to the reception conditions when the input source is set to “HD Radio”.

STEREO : In the FM mode, this light when receiving stereo broadcasts.

TUNED : Lights when the broadcast is properly tuned in.

AUTO : This light when in the auto tuning mode.

Q5 Decoder indicators

These light when the respective decoders are operating.

Q6 HD indicator

This light during HD Radio reception.

99

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 99 2010/08/23 18:33:23

ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Rear panel

See the page indicated in parentheses ( ).

Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3

FRANÇAIS

Q2 Q1

ITALIANO

Q0

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA o

Q8

Q7 i q w e r t y u q RS-232C connector ·································································· (54) w HD Radio antenna terminals ·················································· (22) e Analog audio connectors ···········································(17 – 21, 23) r UNBALANCED PRE OUT terminals ········································· (6) t 7.1CH INPUT connectors ························································ (23) y BALANCED PRE OUT terminals ··············································· (6) u AC inlet (AC IN) ·········································································· (7) i COMPONENT VIDEO connectors ····································(17 – 19) o HDMI connectors ····································································· (16)

Q0 Digital audio connectors ··················································(17 – 21)

Q1 NETWORK connector ······························································ (24)

Q2 FLASHER IN jack

Used when using a control BOX or other such control devices to control this unit.

Q3 REMOTE CONTROL jacks ······················································· (53)

Q4 M-XPort jack ············································································ (23)

Q5 SIRIUS connector ···································································· (22)

Q6 DC OUT jacks ··········································································· (54)

Q7 VIDEO connectors ····························································(17 – 19)

Q8 SIGNAL GND terminal ···························································· (21)

NOTE

Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel.

Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

100

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 100 2010/08/23 18:33:24

SVENSKA

Remote control unit

For buttons not explained here, see the page indicated in parentheses ( ).

Q7 q w e r t

Q8

Q9

W0 q w e r

NEDERLANDS y u i o

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

W1

W2

W3

W4

W5

W6

W7

W8

R4

R5

W9

E0

E1

E2

E3

E4

E5

E6

E7

E8

E9

R0

R1

R2

R3

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH q Display r indicator ················································· (91) w SOURCE power button ·················· (62, 92, 93) e SET button ······································ (91, 93, 95) r HDMI button ········································· (16, 94) t Input mode button (A/D) ··························· (71) y Input source select buttons ······················· (25) u Source select button (SOURCE SEL) ········ (25) i INPUT buttons (d, f) ····················· (25, 62, 91) o DISPLAY/

Tuner mode (T.MODE) button ············ (32, 86)

Q0 SHIFT/TOP MENU button ·············· (33, 36, 65)

Q1 Cursor buttons (uio p) ·················· (64 – 66)

Q2 MENU button ·············································· (66)

Q3 MACRO button ··········································· (95)

Q4 Number buttons ······················· (33, 36, 91, 95)

Q5 Clear button (CLR) ······································ (96)

Q6 TUNING buttons (+, –) ······························· (32)

Q7 Remote control signal transmitter

Q8 Power buttons (ON, STANDBY) ············ (7, 12)

Q9 Speaker A/B button (SPKR A/B) ··············· (26)

W0 TEST TONE button ····································· (79)

W1 Muting button (MUTE) ······························ (26)

W2 Light button ················································ (96)

W3 Master volume control buttons

(VOLUME +, –)· ··········································· (26)

W4 Surround mode (SURR.) /

MEMORY button ···························· (33, 36, 44)

W5 SEARCH/

Information (INFO) button ······· (27, 31, 33, 66)

W6 ENTER button ····································· (64 – 66)

W7 RETURN button ·································· (64 – 66)

W8 System buttons

························· (28, 29, 36 – 38, 40, 42, 43, 92)

• Pause button (3)

• Play button (1)

• Stop button (2)

• Skip buttons (8, 9)

• Search buttons (6, 7)

FM/AM band switching button (BAND) ··· (34)

W9 STEREO button ··········································· (46)

E0 AUTO buttons ······························· (44, 60, 115)

E1 MULTEQ® button ······································· (74)

E2 Audio delay button (A.DELAY) ·················· (76)

E4 Channel level button (CH LVL) ·················· (56)

E5 SLEEP button ·············································· (56)

E6 INSERT button ············································ (65)

E7 DELETE button ··········································· (65)

E8 Pure direct button (P.DIRECT) ··················· (46)

E9 REPEAT button ····································· (28, 29)

R0 RANDOM button ·································· (28, 29)

R1 Audyssey DSX button (A-DSX) ················· (75)

R2 Dynamic EQ®/Dynamic Volume® button

(DYN EQ/VOL) ······································ (74, 75)

R3 Video select button (V.SEL) ······················ (69)

R4 TV operation buttons

(TV POWER / INPUT) ··························· (92, 93)

R5 CHANNEL/

PRESET buttons (+, –) ·············· (33, 36, 92, 93)

101

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 101 2010/08/23 18:33:25

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Remote control unit

Inserting the batteries

q Remove the rear lid in the direction of the arrow and remove it.

w Load the two batteries properly as indicated by the marks in the battery compartment.

R03/AAA

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Operating range of the remote control unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

30°

30°

Approx. 23 ft / 7 m e Put the rear cover back on.

NOTE

• Insert the specified batteries in the remote control unit.

• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated close to the unit. (The supplied batteries are only for verifying operation.)

• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the q and w marks in the battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:

• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.

• Do not use two different types of batteries.

• Do not attempt to charge dry batteries.

• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in flames.

• Do not keep the battery in a place exposed to direct sunlight or in places with extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater.

• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

• Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.

• Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the local regulations regarding battery disposal.

NOTE

The set may function improperly or the remote control unit may not operate if the remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight, strong artificial light from an inverter type fluorescent lamp or infrared light.

102

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 102 2010/08/23 18:33:25

Other information

n Trademark information (vpage 103) n Surround (vpage 104) n Relationship between video signals and monitor

output (vpage 108) n Explanation of terms (vpage 109)

Trademark information

This product uses the following technologies:

Manufactured under license from

Audyssey Laboratories™. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey

MultEQ® XT is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories. Audyssey

Dynamic EQ® is a registered trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.

Audyssey Dynamic Volume® is a registered trademark of Audyssey

Laboratories. Audyssey Dynamic

Surround Expansion™ is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.

DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA

CERTIFIED® are trademarks, service marks, or certifi cation marks of the

Digital Living Network Alliance.

Device Class: DMP (Digital Media

Player)

DLNA Certifi ed® Product Function:

FINDS, PLAYS

Content Type: audio, images, videos

(Check supported media formats.)

DLNA consumer website: www.dlna.

org

Some content may not be compatible with other DLNA Certifi ed® products

(example: optional media formats)

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Manufactured under license from

Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro

Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under

U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;

5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,226,616;

6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;

7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS-HD,

DTS-HD Master Audio, and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Product includes software. © DTS,

Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Manufactured under license from

DTS Licensing Limited. DTS and the

Symbol are registered trademarks,

& DTS Neural Surround and the DTS logos are trademark of DTS, Inc.

Product includes software. © DTS,

Inc. All Rights Reserved.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo and High-

Defi nition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United

States and other countries.

HD Radio™ Technology

Manufactured Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign

Patents. HD Radio™ and the

HD Radio logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifi cally to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certifi ed by the developer to meet

Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffl e, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• Individual users are permitted to use iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffl e, and iPod touch for private copy and playback of non-copyrighted contents and contents whose copy and playback is permitted by law. Copyright infringement is prohibited by law.

SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM

Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.

Service not available in Alaska and

Hawaii.

This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi

Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited

103

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 103 2010/08/23 18:33:26

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Surround

This unit is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.

Surround modes and parameters

This table shows the speakers that can be used in each surround mode and the surround parameters adjustable in each surround mode.

Symbols in the table

S This indicates the audio output channels or surround parameters that can be set.

D This indicates the audio output channels. The output channels depend on the settings of “Speaker Config.” (vpage 78).

Channel output

Surround mode (vpage 44) Front

L/R

Center

Surround

L/R

Surround back

L/R

Front height

L/R

Front wide

L/R

PURE DIRECT (2channel)

PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)

DIRECT (2channel)

DIRECT (Multi-channel)

STEREO

MULTI CH IN

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX

DTS NEO:6

DTS NEO:6 A-DSX

Audyssey DSX

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus

DOLBY TrueHD

DTS SURROUND

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD

DTS Express

MULTI CH STEREO

NEURAL

DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER

DOLBY HEADPHONE

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Dz1

Dz1

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Dz1

Dz1

D

Dz2

Dz2

Dz2

D

D

D

D

D

D

D z 1 A signal for each channel contained in an input signal is output as audio.

z 2 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to “ON–Height–”, sound is output from the front height speakers.

z 3 If “Audyssey DSX” (vpage 75) is set to “ON–Wide–”, sound is output from the front wide speakers.

z 4 Only when “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE+Main” (vpage 79), sound is output from the subwoofer.

z 5 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.

z 6 This item can be selected when a Dolby TrueHD signal is played.

z 7 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is played.

z 8 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is played.

Dz1

Dz1

Dz3

Dz3

Dz3

Subwoofer

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

Dz4

D

Dz4

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

HT-EQ z 5

(vpage 73)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Surround Parameter (vpage 73)

DRC z 6

(vpage 73)

S

D. Comp z 7

(vpage 73)

S

S S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

LFE z 8

(vpage 73)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

104

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 104 2010/08/23 18:33:26

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL

Surround mode (vpage 44) Height Gain

(vpage 73) Panorama

(vpage 73)

Surround Parameter (vpage 73)

PRO LOGIC g/gx Music mode only

Dimension

(vpage 73)

C.Width

(vpage 73)

NEO:6 Music mode only

C.Image

(vpage 73)

PURE DIRECT (2 channel)

PURE DIRECT (Multi-channel)

DIRECT (2 channel)

DIRECT (Multi-channel)

STEREO

MULTI CH IN

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g A-DSX

DTS NEO:6

DTS NEO:6 A-DSX

Audyssey DSX

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL Plus

DOLBY TrueHD

DTS SURROUND

DTS 96/24

DTS-HD

DTS Express

MULTI CH STEREO

NEURAL

DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER

DOLBY HEADPHONE

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S z 9 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to “ON”.

z 10 For HD Audio whose sampling frequency of an input signal is more than 96 kHz, this sound parameter cannot be set.

z 11 This item cannot be set when “MultEQ XT” (vpage 74) is set to “OFF” or “Manual”.

z 12 This item cannot be set when “Dynamic EQ” (vpage 74) is set to “OFF”.

z 13 This item can be set when the input signal is analog, PCM 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz.

Tone z 9

(vpage 73)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Surround

Audyssey Settingsz10 (vpage 74)

MultEQ® XT

(vpage 74)

Dynamic EQ® z 11

(vpage 74)

Dynamic Volume® z 12

(vpage 75)

Audyssey DSX™

Soundstage z 10

(vpage 75)

M-DAX z 13

(vpage 76)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 105

105

2010/08/23 18:33:26

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Surround n

Types of input signals, and corresponding surround modes

This table shows the input signal that can be played in each surround mode. Check the audio signal of the input source then select the surround mode.

Symbols in the table

S This indicates the selectable surround mode.

Surround mode (vpage 44) NOTE

ANALOG

PCM

LINEAR PCM

(multi ch)

LINEAR PCM

(2ch)

DTS-HD

Master

Audio

DTS-HD

DTS-HD

High

Resolution

Audio

DTS

EXPRESS

DTS SURROUND

DTS-HD MSTR

DTS-HD HI RES

DTS ES DSCRT6.1

DTS ES MTRX6.1

DTS SURROUND

DTS 96/24

DTS (–HD) + PLgx MOVIE

DTS (–HD) + PLgx MUSIC

DTS (–HD) + PLgz

DTS EXPRESS

DTS (–HD) + NEO:6

DTS NEO:6 CINEMA

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

DTS NEO:6 CINEMA A-DSX

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC A-DSX

Audyssey DSX

DOLBY SURROUND

DOLBY TrueHD

DOLBY DIGITAL+

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY (D+) (HD) +EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MOVIE

DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgx MUSIC

DOLBY (D) (D+) (HD) +PLgz

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MOVIE

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx MUSIC

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gx GAME

DOLBY PRO LOGIC gz

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MOVIE

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME z z z z z

5

5 z 1z3 z 1z3

5 z 5 z 2z3

1z3 z 4 z 5 z 1z3 z 5

5 z 5 z 5 z 1z3 z 1z3 z 5 z 2z3 z 1z3 z 4 z 1z3 z 1z3 z 1z3 z 4 z 5 z 5 z 5

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S z 1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.

z 2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.

z 3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.

z 4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.

z 5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 75) setting is set to “ON”.

DTS ES

DSCRT

(With Flag)

S

S

S

S

S

S

Input signal types and formats

DTS

DTS ES

MTRX

(With Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS 96/24

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

DOLBY

TrueHD

DOLBY

DOLBY

DIGITAL Plus

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With no

Flag)

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1/5/4ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(4/3ch)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

106

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 106 2010/08/23 18:33:26

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH

Surround mode (vpage 44) NOTE

ANALOG

PCM

LINEAR PCM

(multi ch)

LINEAR PCM

(2ch)

DTS-HD

Master

Audio

DTS-HD

DTS-HD

High

Resolution

Audio

DTS

EXPRESS

DOLBY SURROUND

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MOVIE A-DSX

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g MUSIC A-DSX

DOLBY PRO LOGIC g GAME A-DSX

Audyssey DSX

DOLBY VIRTUAL SPEAKER

DOLBY HEADPHONE

MULTI CH IN

MULTI CH IN

MULTI CH IN + PLgx MOVIE

MULTI CH IN + PLgx MUSIC

MULTI CH IN + PLgz

MULTI CH IN + Dolby EX

MULTI CH IN 7.1

Audyssey DSX

DIRECT

DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

MULTI CH STEREO

STEREO

STEREO

NEURAL

NEURAL

AUTO

AUTO z z z z

5 z 2z3 z 1z3

4

3

3

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S (7.1)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S z 1 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.

z 2 If “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” (vpage 78) is set to “1spkr” or “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.

z 3 This surround mode can be selected when “Amp Assign” (vpage 78) is set to “Normal”.

z 4 If “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” (vpage 78) is set to “None”, this surround mode cannot be selected.

z 5 The same was when “Audyssey DSX™” (vpage 75) setting is set to “ON”.

DTS ES

DSCRT

(With Flag)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

Input signal types and formats

DTS

DTS ES

MTRX

(With Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS 96/24

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

DOLBY

TrueHD

DOLBY

DOLBY

DIGITAL Plus

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL EX

(With no

Flag)

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1/5/4ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(4/3ch)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

ENGLISH

Surround

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

S

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 107

107

2010/08/23 18:33:26

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO

Relationship between video signals and monitor output

3

4

1

2

13

14

15

16

17

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

18

19

20

21

Video Convert

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON z1

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

HDMI

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

S

S

S

S

A

A

A

S

S

S

S

Input Signals

COMPONENT

A

A

A

S (1080p)

S (1080i ~ 480p)

S (480i/576i)

S (1080p)

S (1080p)

S (1080i ~ 480p)

S (480i/576i)

A

A

S

S

A

S

S

A

A

S

S

A

S

A

S

S

A

S

S

A

S

S Video signal input present

A No video signal input z 1 When no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on

VIDEO

A

A

S

A

A

A

S

S

S

S

A

ZONE2 MONITOR OUT

Input Signals

COMPONENT VIDEO

Output Signals

COMPONENT VIDEO

A

A

A

S

A

A

A

S

S

S

A

S

S

S

A

S

ESPAÑOL NEDERLANDS

MAIN ZONE MONITOR OUT

Output Signals

HDMI

Wall paper

COMPONENT

A

A

VIDEO

A

VIDEO

COMPONENT

COMPONENT

HDMI

A

A

A

HDMI

A No video signal output

COMPONENT

COMPONENT

A

COMPONENT

A

A

A

A

COMPONENT

SVENSKA

VIDEO

A

A

VIDEO

A

A

A

VIDEO

A

VIDEO

A

VIDEO

VIDEO

A

VIDEO

A

VIDEO

A

VIDEO

HDMI

Only the menu is displayed

S (VIDEO)

Menu displayed

COMPONENT

A z2

A z2

A (VIDEO) z3

A (COMPONENT) z2

A (COMPONENT) z3 S (COMPONENT)

A (COMPONENT)

S (VIDEO)

S (COMPONENT) A (COMPONENT) z3

A

A

VIDEO

A

A

(VIDEO)

A

(VIDEO)

A

S (HDMI)

A z2

A (VIDEO)

A

A (COMPONENT) z2

A z2

A (VIDEO)

A (VIDEO)

A

Only the menu is displayed

A (COMPONENT) z2

A z2

A (VIDEO)

A

A (VIDEO)

A

A (COMPONENT) z2

A (VIDEO)

S ( ) Superimposed on the picture indicated in ( ).

A ( ) Only the picture in ( ) is output.

A Neither the picture nor the menu is output.

z 2 Only the menu is displayed when no HDMI monitor is connected or the HDMI monitor’s power is not on.

z 3 If an HDMI monitor is not connected or power of an HDMI monitor is not turned on, the menu is superimposed on a video image in parenthesis.

• The main zone video conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and

PAL-60.

• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in PAL format from the S-Video and Video connectors.

• The menu display cannot be superimposed when x.v.Color signals and computer’s resolution (e.g. VGA) are input.

NOTE

• If you operate the menu while playing back 3D video content, the playback video is replaced by the menu screen. The playback video is not displayed behind the menu screen.

• This unit does not show the status display while playing back 3D video content.

108

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 108 2010/08/23 18:33:27

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Explanation of terms

A

A2DP

A2DP is one profile of Bluetooth definded for in-car devices or AV devices that use wireless communication instead of a cable.

Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color

Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.

Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™

(A-DSX)

Realistic reproduction of sound relies on the ability of audio systems to match human hearing performance. Three key requirements are: (1) frequency response, (2) dynamic range, and (3) accurate spatial reproduction. The requirements for frequency response have already been surpassed with sampling rates that exceed human hearing.

The dynamic range limits of human perception have also been met with current digital audio systems operating capable of signal to noise ratios that approach 120 dB. Accurate spatial sound rendering, however, has not yet reached the limits of perception as human perception relies on the combination of sounds arriving from many more directions than what 5.1-channel surround sound systems provide. Audyssey DSX technology was developed to overcome the spatial sound rendering limitations faced by 5.1-channel surround sound formats.

The ITU 5.1-channel channel standard recommends three front loudspeakers and two rear loudspeakers.

The Left (L) and Right (R) front loudspeakers should be placed at ±30° relative to the central listening position. The Center (C) loudspeaker should be at

0° and the surround loudspeakers (SL, SR) should be placed between 100° and 120°. All loudspeakers must be equidistant from the center listening position or compensated with time delay if that is not possible. A separate low-frequency effects

(LFE) channel is used to reproduce additional bass content from the subwoofer.

There are certain things that 5.1-channel surround sound systems do well compared to 2-channel stereo. For example, it is possible to move sounds across the front seamlessly. It is also possible to create ambience behind the listener. But 5.1 channel surround systems do not provide enough channels from which to render the required refl ected sound components for a seamless and enveloping soundstage. Unfortunately, the additional two back surround channels in 7.1-channel systems are not in the right place to provide a significant perceptual improvement.

Adding more channels to a surround system is not for special effects. Accurate spatial sound reproduction requires rendering of directional sound cues and non-directional ambient cues.

Refl ections arriving after the direct sound play a critical role in the perception of soundstage width and depth. To have the most impact, additional surround channels should be used to control the direction, time of arrival, and frequency response of the refl ected sound to render an expanded soundstage that reproduces sound with better localization and envelopment than what 5.1-channel systems provide.

Research in the perception of auditory source width has shown that there are strong preferences in the direction of refl ected sound and the perception of soundstage width and spaciousness. The single most important direction of side-wall refl ections is ±60°. DSX provides a pair of Wide channels

(LW and RW) at ±60° with appropriate frequency response and perceptual processing to match the requirements of human hearing. In fact, the Wide channels are much more critical in the presentation of a realistic soundstage than then Back Surround channels found in traditional 7.1-channel systems. A more enveloping 7.1-channel system is one in which

Wide speakers are used instead of Back Surround speakers. Adding surround channels behind the listener has a very small impact compared to the increase in envelopment and soundstage width that the front wide channels will provide.

After side refl ections, the next most important acoustical and perceptual cues come from refl ections above the front stage. DSX provides a pair of Height channels (LH and RH) at a ±45° azimuth angle and elevated to a 45° angle in the median plane.

In addition to creating new Wide and Height channels, DSX also provides Surround Processing to enhance the envelopment of the Surround and

Back Surround channels (if present). DSX Surround

Processing processes the standard surround signals in the time and frequency domains to improve the perceived sense of envelopment and blending with the other speakers in the surround system.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion is a scalable system that can adapt to the practical needs of the user. The first level of surround stage enhancement comes from adding the Wide channels. The second level comes from adding the Height channels. If it is practical to have both Wides and Heights then the surround performance will be further enhanced.

DSX automatically reconfigures its processing to optimize surround rendering over any number of available speakers beyond that of 5.1-channel.

Audyssey Dynamic EQ®

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.

Audyssey Dynamic Volume®

Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.

Audyssey MultEQ® XT

Audyssey MultEQ XT is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ XT calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Auto Lip Sync

If you connect this unit to a TV that supports the

Auto Lip Sync function, it can automatically correct delay between the audio and video.

B

Bluetooth

Bluetooth is a short-distance wireless communication technology used for connecting handheld devices several meters apart. This enables notebook computers, PDA s, mobile phones, etc. to connect without a cable for transmitting audio and data.

D

Deep Color

This technology allows expression of more number of colors than the conventional 8 bits and can reproduce colors close to natural ones without color streak.

DLNA

DLNA and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks and/ or service marks of Digital Living Network Alliance.

Some contents may not be compatible with other

DLNA CERTIFIED™ products.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories.

A total of 5.1 channels are played: 3 front channels

(“FL”, “FR” and “C”), 2 surround channels

(“SL” and “SR”) and the “LFE” channel for low frequencies.

Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a “threedimensional” feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved.

A realistic, powerful sense of presence is achieved when playing movie sources in AV rooms as well.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX is a 6.1-channel surround format proposed by Dolby Laboratories that allows users to enjoy in their homes the “DOLBY DIGITAL

SURROUND EX” audio format jointly developed by

Dolby Laboratories and Lucas Films.

The 6.1 channels of sound, including surround back channels, provide improved sound positioning and expression of space.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1 channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance.

It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby

Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback equipment.

109

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 109 2010/08/23 18:33:27

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Explanation of terms

Dolby Headphone

The Dolby Headphone technology provides a surround sound listening experience over headphones.

When listening to multichannel content such as DVD movies over headphones, the listening experience is fundamentally different than listening to speakers. Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing, immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from stereo material.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master.

This format provides the facility to support up to

8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of

96kHz/24bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit resolution. Dolby TrueHD is adopted for applications that put very high importance on sound quality.

Dolby Pro Logic g

Dolby Pro Logic g is a matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories.

Regular music such as that on CDs is encoded into

5 channels to achieve an excellent surround effect.

The surround channel signals are converted into stereo and full band signals (with a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) to create a “three-dimensional” sound image offering a rich sense of presence for all stereo sources.

Dolby Pro Logic gx

Dolby Pro Logic gx is a further improved version of the Dolby Pro Logic g matrix decoding technology.

Audio signals recorded in 2 channels are decoded to achieve a natural sound with up to 7.1 channels.

There are three modes: “Music” suited for playing music, “Movie” suited for playing movies, and

“Game” which is optimized for playing games.

Dolby Pro Logic gz

Dolby Pro Logic gz introduces a new dimension to

Home Entertainment through the addition of a pair of front height channels. Compatible with stereo,

5.1-channel and 7.1-channel content, Dolby Pro

Logic gz provides enhanced spaciousness, depth and dimension to movies, concert video and video game playback while maintaining the full integrity of the source mix.

Dolby Pro Logic gz identifies and decodes spatial cues that occur naturally in all content, directing this information to the front height channels, complementing the performance of left and right surround sound speakers. Content that is encoded with Dolby Pro Logic gz height channel information can be even more revealing, with perceptually discrete height channel information bringing an exciting new dimension to home entertainment.

Dolby Pro Logic gz, with front height channels is also an ideal alternative for households that cannot support the placement of back surround speakers of a typical 7.1-channel system but may have bookshelf space available to support the addition of height speakers.

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technology certified by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized surround sound experience from two speakers using a multichannel Dolby Digital source.

Additionally, Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby Pro Logic g.

Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original

Multichannel audio information and provides the listener with the sensation of being surrounded by additional speakers.

Downmix

This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to less number of channels and plays back.

DTS

This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS.

When playing back audio by connecting this system with a device such as DTS amplifier, accurate sound field position and realistic sound effect as if you are in a movie theater can be obtained.

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1 channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1 channels of digital discrete surround sound.

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound.

Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format inserting a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder.

DTS Express

DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1 channels, 24 to 256 kbps).

DTS-HD

This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional

DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray

Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and

DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to

7.1 channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound.

This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data.

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96kHz/24bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192kHz/24bit resolution.

It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround

5.1-channel data.

DTS Neural Surround

DTS Neural Surround has been chosen as the surround sound format for XM Satellite Radio’s

“XM HD Surround”, TV sports broadcasting, 7.1 games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as leading FM and HD Radio stations. It delivers the rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround sound by unmasking the audio details, typically lost by other playback modes. Audiences will experience the deep ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games.

DTS NEO:6™ Surround

DTS NEO:6™ is a matrix decoding technology for achieving 6.1-channel surround playback with 2-channel sources. It includes “DTS NEO:6

Cinema” suited for playing movies and “DTS

NEO:6 Music” suited for playing music.

Dynamic range

The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device.

F

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec)

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) is a codec for audio data compression.

H

HDCP

When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization.

HDMI

This is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia

Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. Video signal and audio signal can be connected using 1 cable.

110

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 110 2010/08/23 18:33:27

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

L

LFE

This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass.

M

MAIN ZONE

The room where this unit is placed is called the

MAIN ZONE .

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3)

This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the “MPEG-1” video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2,

MPEG-4

These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio.

Video standards include “MPEG-1 Video”, “MPEG-

2 Video”, “MPEG-4 Visual”, “MPEG-4 AVC”. Audio standards include “MPEG-1 Audio”, “MPEG-2

Audio”, “MPEG-4 AAC”.

P

Pairing

Pairing is an operation required for settings to connect two Bluetooth devices. Pairing enables

Bluetooth devices to access each other.

Progressive (sequential scanning)

This is a scanning system of video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and bleeding.

Protection Circuit

This is a function to prevent damage to components within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or temperature for any reason.

In this unit, the power indicator blinks and the unit enters standby mode when an abnormality occurs.

S

Sampling frequency

Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave

(analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal).

The number of readings taken in one second is called the “sampling frequency”. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.

Speaker impedance

This is an AC resistance value, indicated in Ω

(ohms). Greater power can be obtained with this value smaller.

sYCC601 color

Like x.v.Color, each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.

V vTuner

This is a free online content server for Internet radio. Note that usage fees are included in upgrade costs.

For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.

vTuner website: http://www.radiomarantz.com

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and

BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

W

WAV (Wave)

WAV is a standard audio format of Windows. The file size tends to increase, but sound near the original sound can be maintained.

Windows Media DRM

This is a copyright protection technology developed by Microsoft.

Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (WM-DRM) to protect the integrity of their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure

Content (WM-DRM Software). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content (Secure

Content Owners) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure

Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM

Software’s ability to play unprotected content.

A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for

Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC.

Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.

Windows Media Player Ver.11

This is a media player distributed free of charge by

Microsoft Corporation.

It can be used to play playlists created with

Windows Media Player Ver. 11 as well as files in such formats as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

This is audio compression technology developed by

Microsoft Corporation.

WMA data can be encoded using Windows

Media® Player Ver.7, 7.1, Windows Media®Player for Windows® XP and Windows Media® Player 9

Series.

To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly.

Explanation of terms

X x.v.Color

This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. “x.v.Color” is a Sony registered trademark.

Z

ZONE2

This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE2 playback). The room for ZONE2 playback is called

ZONE2.

ZONE3

This unit can operate in a room other than the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE) (ZONE3 playback). The room for ZONE3 playback is called

ZONE3.

111

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 111 2010/08/23 18:33:27

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Troubleshooting

If a problem should arise, first check the following:

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Is the set being operated as described in the user guide?

3. Are the other components operating properly?

If this unit does not operate properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction.

In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.

G GeneralH

Symptom

Power does not turn on.

Display is off.

Cause/Solution

• Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet.

• Set “Display” on the menu to something other than “OFF”.

Set does not operate properly.

• Reset the microprocessor.

G VideoH

Symptom Cause/Solution

No picture appears.

• Check the TV connection.

• Set the TV input correctly.

Page

7

86

115

Page

7

7

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

G AudioH

Symptom Cause/Solution

Audio is not output.

• Check the connections for all devices.

• Check the speaker connections.

• Check whether the audio device power is turned on.

• Adjust the master volume.

• Cancel the mute mode.

• Select a suitable input source.

• Select a suitable input mode.

• Disconnect the headphones. No sound is output from the speakers or the PRE OUT connectors when headphones are connected.

No sound is produced from surround speaker.

• Check if the surround speakers are connected to the SURROUND terminals.

No sound is produced from surround back speaker.

No sound is produced from front height speaker.

No sound is produced from front wide speaker.

No sound is produced from subwoofer.

• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.

• Set “Speaker Config.” – “S.Back” on the menu to something other than “None”.

• Set the surround mode to something other than “STEREO”.

• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.

• Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Height” on the menu to something other than “None”.

• Set “Amp Assign” on the menu to “Normal”.

• Set “Speaker Config.” – “F.Wide” on the menu to something other than “None”.

• Check the subwoofer connections.

• Turn on the subwoofer’s power.

• Set “Speaker Config.” – “Subwoofer” on the menu to “Yes”.

• If “Front” and “Center” for “Speaker Config.” are set to “Large”, and “Subwoofer Mode” is set to “LFE”, no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected surround mode.

• Set “Decode Mode” on the menu to “Auto” or “DTS”.

DTS sound is not output.

Dolby TrueHD, DTS-

HD, Dolby Digital

Plus audio is not output.

• Make HDMI connections.

Page

7, 16 – 24

6, 49 – 51

26, 62

26, 62

25, 62

71

98

78

78

44

78

78

78

79

6, 49 – 51

7

78

78, 79

71

16

112

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 112 2010/08/23 18:33:27

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

G HDMIH

Symptom

No audio is output with HDMI connection.

No video is output with HDMI connection.

When the following operations are performed on devices compatible with HDMI control, the same operations occur on this unit.

• Power ON/OFF

• Switching audio output devices

• Adjust volume

• Switch input source

Cause/Solution

• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.

• When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set “HDMI

Audio Out” on the menu to “AMP”.

• When outputting HDMI audio from a TV, set “HDMI Audio Out” on the menu to “TV”.

• Check the connection of the HDMI connectors.

• Set the input source to match the connected HDMI connector.

• Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection

(HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output correctly.

• Set “HDMI Control” on the menu to “OFF”. To operate power only for each device, set “Power Off Control” to “OFF”.

G SIRIUS Satellite RadioH

Symptom Cause/Solution

“CHECK SIRIUS

TUNER” is displayed.

”ANTENNA ERROR” is displayed.

”NO SIGNAL” is displayed.

”INVALID

CHANNEL” is displayed.

”ACQUIRING

SIGNAL” is displayed.

• The SiriusConnect Home Tuner unit is not connected. Check that the connections are correct.

• The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are correct.

• The antenna is not connected. Check that the connections are correct.

• Channel is not present. Select another channel.

”Call SIRIUS” z is displayed.

• The signal cannot be received. Reposition your SiriusConnect

Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.

• Displays while SiriusConnect Home Tuner is connected. Reposition your SiriusConnect Home Tuner and Home Dock antenna.

• Channels are not subscribed to. If you subscribe to the channel, you can receive the channel.

”SUBSCRIPTION

UPDATED” is displayed.

”Enter Lock Code

[ ]” is displayed.

• While updating contract information.

• Selected channels are locked. Please insert pass word (4 digits) into “[ ]” z After scroll displays “Call 888-539-....” twice, displays “Call SIRIUS”.

Page

16

80

80

16

16, 25

15

55, 81

Page

22

22

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

G HD Radio receiverH

Symptom

Reception fails, or there is a lot of noise or distortion.

Cause/Solution

• Change the antenna orientation or position.

• Separate the AM loop antenna from the unit.

• Use an FM outdoor antenna.

• Separate the antenna from other connection cables.

Page

22

22

22

22

G M-XPortH

Symptom

Audio is not output when a wireless receiver (RX101 is connected).

• Check that the Bluetooth device and Wireless receiver (RX101) are correctly paired.

Cause/Solution Page

G Internet radio / Media server / iPod / USB memory device / Flickr / Napster / Pandora / RhapsodyH

Symptom Cause/Solution Page

When a USB memory device is connected, “USB” is not displayed on the menu.

Files on a USB memory device cannot be played.

The file names are not displayed properly (“...”, etc.).

Internet radio cannot be played.

• The set cannot recognize a USB memory device. Check the connection.

• A USB memory device not conforming to mass storage class or

MTP standards is connected. Connect a USB memory device conforming to mass storage class or MTP standards.

• A USB memory device that the set cannot recognize is connected.

This is not a malfunction. Marantz does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power.

• USB memory device is connected via USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port.

• USB memory device is in format other than FAT16 or FAT32.

Set the format to FAT16 or FAT32. For details, refer to the USB memory device’s operating instructions.

• USB memory device is divided into multiple partitions. When divided into multiple partitions, only files stored in the top partition can be played.

• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record the files in a compatible format.

• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.

• Characters that cannot be displayed are used. This is not a malfunction. On this set, characters that cannot be displayed are replaced with a “.”.

• Ethernet cable is not properly connected or network is disconnected. Check the connection status.

• Program is being broadcast in non-compatible format. Only

Internet radio programs in MP3 and WMA can be played on this set.

• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.

• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Choose a radio station that is currently broadcasting.

• IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.

20

28

28

24

34

35

83

113

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 113 2010/08/23 18:33:27

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Symptom

Files stored on a computer cannot be played.

Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server.

Sound quality is poor or played sound is noisy.

Cannot login to Rhapsody.

(“Incorrect

Username or

Password” is displayed.)

Cannot compile

Playlist.

Cause/Solution

• Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format.

• You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this set.

• Set and computer are connected by USB cable. The set’s USB port cannot be used for connection to a computer.

• The computer’s or router’s firewall is activated. Check the computer’s or router’s firewall settings.

• Computer’s power is not turned on. Turn on the power.

• Server is not running. Launch the server.

• Set’s IP address is wrong. Check the set’s IP address.

• Connecting to the media server may take a few minutes the first time you attempt to make a connection.

• Some iPods do not support being used connected directly to the

USB port.

• “No Connection” may display if you connect an iPod that has only a small amount of charge remaining in its battery to this unit.

Should this occur, charge the iPod before connecting it to this unit. iPod cannot be played.

When an iPod is connected, “No

Connection” is displayed.

Cannot connect to preset or favorite radio stations.

For some radio stations, “Server

Full” or “Connection

Down” is displayed and station cannot be connected to.

Sound is broken during playback.

• Radio station is not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before trying again.

• Radio station is not currently in service. It is not possible to connect to radio stations that are no longer in service.

• Station is congested or not currently broadcasting. Wait a while before trying again.

• Network’s signal transfer speed is slow or communications lines or radio station is congested. This is not a malfunction. When playing broadcast data with a high bit rate, the sound may be broken, depending on the communications conditions.

• File being played has a low bit rate. This is not a malfunction.

• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Rhapsody has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is not displayed.) www.rhapsody.com/marantz

• This unit does not respond to playlist compilation. When the playlist is compiled in PC Application, it is registered to “My

Library”. In this way, the playlist can be played in this unit

20

83

83

Page

34

34

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Symptom

Cannot delete

Rhapsody Channel registered in “My

Channels”

Cannot delete

Tracks, Playlists,

Channels registered in “My Library”

Cannot login to

Napster. (“Incorrect

Username or

Password” is displayed.)

Cannot login to

Pandora. (“Email address” or

“Password” is displayed.)

Cause/Solution

• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application.

• Cannot be done with this unit. Delete from PC Application.

• Login information is incorrect. Check if the Username for Napster has been properly entered. Re-enter the Password. (Password is not displayed.) http://www.napster.com/choose/index_default.html

• Login information is incorrect. Check if the “Email address” for

Pandora has been properly entered. Re-enter the “Password”.

(Password is not displayed.) http://www.pandora.com/marantz

G Remote Control UnitH

Symptom

The set cannot be operated with the remote control unit.

Cause/Solution

• Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries.

• Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30°.

• Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit.

• Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks.

• The set’s remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light.

Page

83

40

Page

102

102

102

102

102

114

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 114 2010/08/23 18:33:27

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Resetting the microprocessor

Perform this procedure if the display is abnormal or if operations cannot be performed.

When the microprocessor is reset, all the settings are reset to their default values.

Various setting details can be saved and reset on this device. If setting details are saved before returning to the default values, after returning to the default settings, setting details can be returned to the same values as before returning to the defaults.

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS DEUTSCH ENGLISH

ON/STANDBY AUTO

SURROUND MODE

MENU

SLEEP

ENTER

1 When the power is ON, press and hold SLEEP and ENTER for more than 3 seconds.

After “MEMORY SAVING” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE”is shown to inform you that the settings have been saved.

2 Turn off the power using ON/STANDBY .

3 Press ON/STANDBY while simultaneously pressing SURROUND MODE and AUTO .

4 Once the display starts flashing at intervals of about 1 second, release the two buttons.

5 Press and hold SLEEP and MENU for more than 3 seconds.

After “MEMORY LOAD” is shown on the display, “COMPLETE” is shown to inform you that the settings have returned to those saved in step 1.

• To return all of the settings to the default values, perform steps 2 to 4 without performing step 1.

• If in step 3 the display does not flash at intervals of about 1 second, start over from step 1.

115

2010/08/23 18:33:27 1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 115

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Specifications

n Audio section

Analog

Input sensitivity/Input impedance:

Frequency response:

S/N:

Distortion:

Rated output:

S/N:

Rated output:

Distortion factor:

200 mV/47 kΩ

10 Hz – 100 kHz — +1, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)

105 dB (IHF–A weighted, DIRECT mode)

0.005 % (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)

Unbalanced pre-output: 1.2 V

Balanced pre-output: 2.4 V

Digital

D/A output:

Digital input:

Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)

S/N ratio — 102 dB

Dynamic range — 100 dB

Format — Digital audio interface

Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)

Input sensitivity:

RIAA deviation:

2.5 mV

±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)

150 mV

0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V) n Video section

Standard video connectors

Input/output level and impedance:

Frequency response:

Color component video connector

Input/output level and impedance:

Frequency response:

1 Vp-p, 75 Ω

5 Hz – 10 MHz — +1, –3 dB

Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω

P

B

/ C

B

signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω

P

R

/ C

R

signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75 Ω

5 Hz – 60 MHz — +0, –3 dB (when “Video Convert” set to “OFF”)

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA n Tuner section

Receiving Range:

Usable Sensitivity:

S/N (IHF-A):

Total harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz):

[FM]

(Note: μV at 75 Ω, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)

87.5 MHz – 107.9 MHz

1.5 μV (14.8 dBf)

MONO 78 dB

STEREO 68 dB

HD 85 dB

MONO 0.1 %

STEREO 0.2 %

HD 0.02 %

530 kHz – 1710 kHz

18 μV

85 dB

0.02 %

[AM] n General

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Maximum external dimensions:

Weight: n Remote control unit (RC011SR)

Batteries:

AC 120 V, 60 Hz

60 W

0.2 W (Standby)

4.0 W (CEC standby)

440 (W) x 187 (H) x 395 (D) mm

10.1 kg

R03/AAA Type (two batteries)

For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

116

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 116 2010/08/23 18:33:27

Index

v Numerics

2.1-channel ························································· 51

3D ······································································· 15

5.1-channel ··················································· 49, 50

6.1-channel ··················································· 48, 50

7.1-channel ··············································· 5, 48, 49 v A

A2DP ·························································· 23, 109

Accessories ·························································· 2

Add New Feature ··············································· 86

Adjust CH ··························································· 76

Adjusting the master volume ····························· 26

Adobe RGB color / Adobe YCC601 color ········· 109

A-DSX Soundstage ············································· 75

AM loop antenna ················································ 22

Amp Assign ························································ 78

Antenna Aiming ·················································· 68

ARC ···································································· 15

Aspect ································································ 70

Audio Adjust ······················································· 73

Audio cable ······················· 6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23

Audio Delay ························································ 76

Audio Setup ························································ 81

Audio/Video Adjust ············································· 72

Audyssey Auto Setup ····································· 8, 52

Audyssey DSX ···················································· 75

Audyssey Dynamic EQ ······························· 74, 109

Audyssey Dynamic Surround Expansion™

(A-DSX) ····························································· 109

Audyssey Dynamic Volume ······················· 75, 109

Audyssey MultEQ XT ··························· 74, 99, 109

Audyssey Settings ············································· 74

Auto Lip Sync ············································· 80, 109

Auto Preset ························································ 67

Auto Setup ····················································· 8, 52 v B

Base Curve Copy ················································ 76

Bass ····························································· 73, 83

Bass Setting ······················································· 79

Bi-amp ································································ 51

Bluetooth ···················································· 23, 109

Brightness ·························································· 77 v C

Cable

Audio cable ····················· 6, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 23

Coaxial digital cable ········································· 18

SVENSKA NEDERLANDS

Component video cable ························ 17, 18, 19

Ethernet cable·················································· 24

HDMI cable ··················································· 7, 16

Optical cable ··································· 17, 19, 20, 21

Speaker cable ···················································· 6

Video cable ··········································· 17, 18, 19

Channel ······························································ 83

Channel Level ··············································· 56, 79

Characters ·························································· 65

Chroma Level ····················································· 77

C.Image ······························································ 73

Coaxial digital cable ············································ 18

Component 2 Output ········································· 85

Component video cable ························· 17, 18, 19

Condensation ······················································· 3

Connection

7.1CH INPUT terminal ······································ 23

Antenna ··························································· 22

Blu-ray Disc player ·································· 7, 16, 17

Cable TV ··························································· 18

CD player ························································· 20

CD recorder ····················································· 21

DC OUT (TRIGGER OUT) jacks ························ 54

Digital camcorder ······································· 16, 19

DVD player ················································· 16, 18

Game console ·················································· 16

HDMI ······························································· 15

HD Radio receiver ············································ 22

Home network (LAN) ······································· 24 iPod (USB) ························································ 20

Power cord ························································· 7

Record player ··················································· 21

Remote control jacks ······································· 53

RS-232C connector ·········································· 54

Satellite tuner ··················································· 18

Set-top box ················································ 16, 18

SIRIUS ····························································· 22

Speaker ························································ 5, 49

TV···························································· 7, 16, 17

USB memory device ········································ 20

Video cassette recorder ····························· 16, 19

Wireless receiver (RX101) ································ 23

Contrast ······························································ 77

Crossover Frequency ········································· 80

C.Width ······························································ 73 v D

D.Comp ······························································ 73

Decode Mode ···················································· 71

Deep Color ················································· 15, 109

Dimension ·························································· 73

Direct mode ······················································· 27

ESPAÑOL ITALIANO FRANÇAIS

Display ·························································· 86, 99

Distance ····························································· 79

DLNA ································································ 109

DNR ···································································· 77

Dolby

Dolby Digital············································· 45, 109

Dolby Digital EX ······································· 45, 109

Dolby Digital Plus ····································· 45, 109

Dolby Headphone ·····································46, 110

Dolby Pro Logic II ············································110

Dolby Pro Logic IIx ··········································110

Dolby Pro Logic IIz ····································48, 110

Dolby TrueHD ············································45, 110

Dolby Virtual Speaker ································46, 110

Downmix ·························································· 110

DRC ···································································· 73

DTS ···························································· 45, 110

DTS 96/24 ·················································45, 110

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 ·································45, 110

DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 ····································45, 110

DTS-HD ·····················································45, 110

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio ······················110

DTS-HD Master Audio ····································110

DTS Digital Surround ······································110

DTS Express ···················································110

DTS NEO:6™ Surround ····························44, 110

DTS Neural Surround ································45, 110

Dynamic EQ ······················································· 74

Dynamic range ················································· 110

Dynamic Volume ················································ 75 v E

Enhancer ···························································· 77

EQ Customize ···················································· 81

Error messages (Auto Setup) ····························· 11

Ethernet cable ···················································· 24

DEUTSCH ENGLISH v H

HDCP ························································· 15, 110

HDMI ·························································· 15, 110

HDMI 1.4a ·························································· 15

HDMI Audio Out ················································ 80

HDMI cable ···················································· 7, 16

HDMI Control ··············································· 55, 80

HDMI Setup ······················································· 80

HD Radio reception ······································ 22, 32

Headphones ······················································· 98

Height Gain ························································ 73

HPF ···································································· 83

HT-EQ ································································· 73

Hue ····································································· 77 v I

Information ························································· 88

Audio Input Signal ············································ 88

HDMI Information ············································ 88

Preset Channel ················································ 88

Status ······························································· 88

Input Assign ······················································· 68

Input Mode ························································· 71

Input Setup ························································· 66

Input signal ················································· 45, 106

Inputting characters ··········································· 65

Interval ······························································· 72 i/p Scaler ····························································· 70 v L

Learn function ···················································· 93

Level Lch ···························································· 83

Level Rch ··························································· 83

LFE ····························································· 73, 111

Listening mode ·················································· 44

Listening position ················································· 8 v F

Fader function ···················································· 56

F.Height ······························································ 78

Firmware Update ··············································· 86

FLAC ································································ 110

Flickr ····························································· 35, 38

FM indoor antenna ············································· 22

Front A/B (connection) ································· 49, 51

Front height speaker ···································· 48, 49

Front Panel ························································· 98

Front wide speaker ······································ 48, 49

F.Wide ································································ 79 v G

GUI ····································································· 84 v M

Macro function ··················································· 95

Maintenance Mode ············································ 86

MAIN ZONE ····················································· 111

Manual EQ ························································· 76

Manual Setup ····················································· 77

Master volume display ······································· 85

M-DAX ································································ 76

Menu map ·························································· 63

Monitor Out ························································ 80

MP3 ·································································· 111

MPEG ······························································· 111

MPEG-4 AAC ···················································· 111

MultEQ XT ·························································· 74

117

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 117 2010/08/23 18:33:27

ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS

Mute Level ························································· 84

M-XPort ······························································ 23 v N

Napster ························································· 35, 39

Network Setup ··················································· 81

Napster Account ·············································· 83

Network Connecting ········································ 81

Network Information ········································ 83

Other································································ 82

Rhapsody Account ··········································· 83 v O

Optical cable ····································· 17, 19, 20, 21

Option Setup ······················································ 84

Add New Feature ············································· 86

Component 2 Output ······································· 85

Display ····························································· 86

Firmware Update ············································· 86

GUI··································································· 84

Maintenance Mode·········································· 86

Setup Lock ······················································· 86

Source Delete ·················································· 84

Trigger Out ······················································· 85

Volume Control ················································ 84

Zone Rename ·················································· 85

ITALIANO ESPAÑOL

Rhapsody ························································· 42

SIRIUS ····························································· 30

Stereo ······························································ 46

USB memory device ········································ 28

WMA ························································· 28, 34

ZONE2 ····························································· 62

ZONE3 ····························································· 62

Playback Mode ··················································· 71

Power Off Control ·············································· 81

Power On Level ················································· 84

Preset codes ······················································ 91

Preset Name ······················································ 68

Preset Skip ························································· 67

Presetting radio stations ···································· 33

Progressive ······················································ 111

Progressive Mode ·············································· 70

Protection circuit ·············································· 111 v R

Random ······························································ 71

Rear panel ························································ 100

Reference Level Offset ······································ 74

Remote control settings ····································· 89

Remote control unit ··································· 90, 101

Inserting the batteries ···································· 102

Operating AV equipment ································· 90

Operating components ···································· 92

Registering Preset Codes ································ 91

Remote mode ···················································· 27

Rename ······························································ 71

Repeat ································································ 71

Resetting the microprocessor ·························· 115

Resolution ·························································· 70

RGB Range ························································· 80

Rhapsody ····················································· 35, 42 v P

Pairing ······························································ 111

Pandora ························································ 35, 40

Panel lock function ············································· 60

Panorama ··························································· 73

Parameter Check ················································ 12

Parental Lock ······················································ 67

Picture Adjust ····················································· 77

Playback

Blu-ray Disc player ··········································· 26

CD player ························································· 26

Direct ······························································· 46

DVD player ······················································· 26

Flickr································································· 38

HD Radio reception ·········································· 32

Internet radio ··················································· 35 iPod(USB) ························································· 27

Media server ···················································· 37

MP3 ··························································· 28, 34

MPEG-4 AAC ··················································· 34

Multi-channel ··················································· 44

Napster ···························································· 39

Network audio ················································· 34

Pandora ···························································· 40

Pure direct ······················································· 46

118 v S

Sampling frequency ········································· 111

S.Back ································································ 78

Screensaver ······················································· 84

Selecting the input source ································· 25

Setup Lock ························································· 86

SIRIUS ·························································· 22, 30

Sleep timer ························································· 56

Slide Show ························································· 72

Source Delete ···················································· 84

Source Level ······················································ 71

Speaker

Connect ··························································· 49

Install ··························································· 5, 48

Set up ·························································· 8, 52

Speaker cable ······················································· 6

NEDERLANDS SVENSKA

Speaker Config. ·················································· 78

Speaker impedance ·········································· 111

Speaker Setup ···················································· 78

Stage Height ······················································ 75

Stage Width ······················································· 75

Standby Source ·················································· 81

Still Picture ························································· 72

Subwoofer setting ················································ 9

Surround back speaker ······················· 5, 48, 49, 50

Surround Mode ·········································· 44, 104

Surround Parameter ··········································· 73

Switcheing the light illumination ························ 89

Switching the front speakers ····························· 26 sYCC601 color ·················································· 111 v T

Tone ··································································· 73

Tone Control ······················································· 73

Trademark ························································ 103

Treble ··························································· 73, 83

Trigger Out ························································· 85

Troubleshooting ··············································· 112

Turning off the sound temporarily ······················ 26

Turn off power (standby) ···································· 12

Turn on power ······················································ 7 v V

Video ·································································· 69

Video cable ············································· 17, 18, 19

Video conversion ················································ 14

Video Convert ····················································· 70

Video Mode ························································ 70

Video Select ······················································· 69

Volume Control ·················································· 84

Volume Level ····················································· 83

Volume Limit ················································ 83, 84 vTuner ······························································ 111 v W

WAV ································································· 111

Web control ························································ 58

Windows Media DRM ······································ 111

Windows Media Player Ver.11 ························· 111

Wireless LAN-compatible mobile terminal ········· 57

WMA ································································ 111 v X x.v.Color ····················································· 15, 111 v Z

ZONE2 ·················································· 61, 99, 111

ZONE3 ·················································· 61, 99, 111

Zone Rename ····················································· 85

Zone Setup ························································· 83

1.AV7005U_ENG.indd 118 2010/08/23 18:33:28

List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés / Lista de códigos pre-ajustados

Device select : BD

Blu-ray Disc Player

D Denon

H Hitachi

I Integra

5034, 5035, 5036

5031, 5032, 5033

5013

J JWC

5014, 5015, 5017, 5018,

5019, 5020

L LG

M Marantz

Mitsubishi

O Onkyo

P Panasonic

Philips

5010, 5011

5000, 5026, 5027

5024, 5025

5013

5001, 5002, 5003

5004

Pioneer

R RCA

S Samsung

Sharp

Sony

T Toshiba

Y Yamaha

5005

5012

5005

5028, 5029, 5030

5007, 5008, 5009, 5016

5012

5021, 5022, 5023

Device select : DVD

DVD Player

A

B BOSE

D Denon

F Funai

G GE

H Harman Kardon 2061

J

K

Aiwa

Apex

Hitachi

JVC

Kenwood

Koss

M Magnavox

Marantz

2036, 2037

2012, 2017, 2018, 2019,

2021, 2034

2038, 2039, 2063

2047, 2048

2049

2009, 2020, 2029, 2033

2008, 2012, 2031

2006, 2010, 2040, 2041,

2042, 2043

2053, 2054

2058

2007, 2011, 2023, 2025

2025, 2065

Marantz (Blu-ray)

Mitsubishi

O Onkyo

Oritron

P Panasonic

Philips

Pioneer

Proscan

2064

2011, 0215

2062

2009, 2030

2003, 2015, 2016, 2055

2007, 2011, 2058

2002, 2014, 2056

2009, 2020, 2032

R RCA

S Sampo

Samsung

Sanyo

Sharp

Sherwood

Sony

T Toshiba

Y Yamaha

Z Zenith

2005, 2009, 2020, 2035,

2057

2041

2008, 2012, 2022, 2024,

2027

2050, 2052

2044, 2045

2051

2001, 2013, 2059

2004, 2008, 2026, 2028

2046, 2060

2010

Device select : SAT

Satellite Receiver

A Alphastar

Amstrad

4027

4046, 4047, 4050

Atsky

B B Sky B

C Chaparral

D DIRECTV

E

DISH Network

Drake

Echostar

Eurosky

Express Vu

F Foxtel

Freesat

4048

4021, 4045, 4046

4039

4001, 4016, 4044

4030

4026

4007, 4017, 4018, 4019,

4020, 4062, 4063, 4064

4047, 4056

4017

4051

4056

Fujitsu

G GE

4025

4002, 4008, 4009

General Instruments 4036, 4037

Gradiente

H Hitachi

Hughes

4044, 4057

4001, 4015

J

Humax

Janeil

JVC

M Mitsubishi

N Nokia

O Optima

P Panasonic

Philips

Proscan

R Radio Shack

RCA

Realistic

Rural Cable

4001, 4016

4049, 4050, 4051, 4052,

4053

4025

4017

4001

4058, 4059, 4060, 4061

4048

4004, 4010

4031, 4035, 4044, 4057

4002, 4008, 4009, 4011

4036, 4037

4002, 4008, 4009, 4029

4040

4036

Television

A Acer

Admiral

Aiko

Aiwa

Akai

Amtron

Anam

Anam National

AOC

Audiovox

B Bell & Howell

Benq

Broksonic

C Celebrity

Citizen

Colortyme

Contec

Contec/Cony

Craig

Crown

Curtis Mathes

D Daewoo

Daytron

Dimensia

Dumont

S Samsung

Schneider

SKY

Skyplus

Skysat

Sony

Star Choice

Star Trak

STS

SuperDish

T Teac

Thomson

Toshiba

U Uniden

Universum

V Video Pall

Z Zenith

4022, 4027, 4042, 4043,

4050, 4054, 4055

4041, 4043

4044, 4045, 4057

4048

4041, 4047, 4056

4003, 4012, 4014, 4065,

4066, 4067

4032

4024

4038

4028

4049

4046, 4056

4001, 4034

4005, 4006, 4013

4056

4025

4023, 4025, 4033

Device select : TV

1141

1002, 1009, 1089

1059

1117, 1118

1001

1023

1113

1023, 1069, 1092

1003, 1024, 1049, 1127

1023

1009, 1025

1104, 1142

1003, 1097, 1098, 1113

1001

1003, 1013, 1023, 1026,

1059, 1063

1003, 1043

1113

1023, 1045, 1047

1020, 1022, 1023, 1113

1023, 1067

1003, 1013, 1025, 1026,

1062, 1103, 1110

1003, 1013, 1024, 1035,

1036, 1059, 1084, 1101

1003, 1013, 1016

1103, 1110

1003, 1010, 1153

E Electroband

Electrohome

Emerson

Envision

F Fisher

Fujitsu

Funai

G Gateway

GE

Goldstar

H Hallmark

Hisense

Hitachi

I Infi nity

J Janeil

JBL

JC Penney

Jensen

JVC

K Kawasho

Kenwood

Kloss Novabeam

KTV

L LG

M M.Wards

Magnavox

Marantz

Mitsubishi

Motorola

N NEC

NET-TV

O Orion

P Panasonic

Philips

1001

1001, 1003, 1069, 1133

1003, 1013, 1015, 1020,

1021, 1022, 1023, 1025,

1038, 1044, 1045, 1048,

1055, 1061, 1094, 1096,

1099, 1101, 1113

1003

1025, 1051, 1091, 1160

1038, 1124, 1125, 1155

1023, 1038, 1113

1150

1003, 1018, 1022, 1046,

1054, 1069, 1085, 1103,

1110, 1113, 1133, 1136,

1153

1003, 1013, 1024, 1030,

1045, 1080, 1100

1112, 1154

1003

1116

1003, 1012, 1031, 1032,

1037, 1041, 1045, 1047,

1065, 1068, 1082, 1088,

1094, 1139, 1140, 1145,

1159

1067

1134

1067

1003, 1013, 1018, 1019,

1024, 1026, 1046, 1047,

1054, 1063, 1083, 1085,

1100, 1103, 1110, 1112,

1133, 1154

1003

1028, 1029, 1045, 1047,

1050, 1060, 1065

1001, 1003

1003

1023, 1056, 1057, 1134

1013, 1023, 1033, 1034,

1073, 1099, 1113

1024, 1030

1002, 1009, 1038

1003, 1052, 1053, 1056,

1057, 1063, 1067, 1081,

1106

1003, 1031, 1067, 1122

1003, 1024, 1051, 1115,

1122, 1133

1014, 1069

1003, 1012, 1024, 1043,

1069

1137, 1150

1020, 1096

1017, 1067, 1069, 1095,

1111

1003, 1011, 1045, 1052,

1054, 1056, 1057, 1058,

1063, 1067, 1069, 1106

RCA

Realistic

Runco

S Sampo

Samsung

Sansui

Sanyo

Sharp

Signature

Sony

Soundesign

Starlite

Supre-Macy

Sylvania

Symphonic

T Tandy

Tatung

Technics

Techwood

Teknika

Telecaption

Toshiba

Totevision

U Universal

Pioneer

Plasmsync

Portland

Price Club

Prism

Proscan

Proton

Q Quasar

R Radio Shack

1003, 1018, 1037, 1070,

1071, 1094, 1145, 1147,

1149

1135

1003, 1013, 1024, 1059

1026

1018

1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,

1008, 1085, 1103, 1110

1003, 1045

1010, 1069, 1073, 1111,

1153

1003, 1013, 1015, 1023,

1024, 1025, 1045, 1100,

1103, 1110, 1113

1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,

1007, 1008, 1014, 1024,

1049, 1069, 1075, 1079,

1085, 1087, 1088, 1093,

1094, 1101, 1103, 1110,

1113, 1153

1013, 1015, 1023, 1025,

1045, 1100, 1103, 1110

1010, 1153

1150

1003, 1013, 1024, 1026,

1040, 1045, 1062, 1078,

1083, 1090, 1100, 1105,

1114, 1120, 1121, 1146,

1148, 1157

1119

1003, 1025, 1051, 1072,

1077, 1091, 1156, 1157,

1158

1003, 1013, 1014, 1015,

1045, 1055, 1064, 1066,

1076, 1089, 1123

1009

1001, 1102, 1108

1003, 1023, 1038, 1063,

1113

1023

1134

1003, 1039, 1042, 1052,

1053, 1056, 1057, 1063,

1067, 1089, 1151

1023, 1039, 1044

1014

1069

1018

1003, 1018

1003, 1009, 1013, 1023,

1024, 1026, 1038, 1045,

1047, 1059, 1063, 1111,

1113

1074

1003, 1019, 1025, 1026,

1042, 1074, 1098, 1107,

1111, 1135, 1136

1013

1046, 1054

PRESET CODE

1

4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 1 2010/08/23 18:25:15

V Video Concepts 1113

W

Viewsonic

Wards

1006, 1022, 1109, 1128,

1129, 1130, 1131, 1138,

1143, 1145, 1150

1003, 1009, 1015, 1024,

1038, 1044, 1046, 1052,

1054, 1056, 1057, 1067,

1086, 1103, 1110

White

Westinghouse

Y Yamaha

Z Zenith

1001, 1101

1003, 1024

1003, 1009, 1010, 1132,

1144, 1153

Device select : CD

CD Player

A AIWA

AKAI

AUDIO

AUDIO LABS

C CALIFORNIA

CARVER

CASIO

CURTIS

D DENON

E EMERSON

F FISHER

G GE

GENEXXA

H HARMON

HITACHI

I INKEL

J JC PENNEY

JVC

K KARDON

KRELL

L LUXMAN

LX I

M MAGNAVOX

MARANTZ

MATHES

MCS

MGA

MISSION

MITSUBISHI

N NAD

NAKAMICHI

NEC MCS

NIKKO

O ONKYO

3001, 3002, 3003

3004, 3005, 3006

3007

3008

3008

3010, 3011, 3009

3012, 3020

3020, 3012

3013

3014

3011, 3015, 3016, 3017,

3018

3019

3014, 3021, 3020

3022, 3023, 3051

3020

3024

3012, 3020, 3025

3026, 3027

3022, 3051, 3023

3010

3035, 3036, 3037, 3038

3012, 3020, 3014

3010, 3039, 3040

3010, 3041, 3042, 3043

3012, 3020

3012, 3020

3023

3010

3023, 3044

3034, 3045

3046, 3047, 3048

3025

3007, 3016

3049, 3050, 3051, 3052,

3055, 3102, 3103

2

PRESET CODE

OPTIMUS

P PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PIONEER

Q QUASAR

R RCA

REALISTIC

ROTEL

RS ORIGINAL

S SAE

SAMSUNG

SANSUI

SANYO

SCOTT

SEARS

SHARP

SHERWOOD

SHURE

SONY

SYLVANIA

SYMPHONIC

T TEAC

TECHNICA

THETA DIGITAL

TOSHIBA

V VICTOR

Y YAMAHA

Z ZENITH

3011, 3014, 3020, 3028,

3053, 3054, 3056, 3057,

3058, 3059

3008, 3060, 3061

3009, 3010, 3010, 3040

3020, 3021, 3062, 3063,

3064

3008

3011, 3014, 3065, 3066,

3067, 3068, 3069

3011, 3014, 3020, 3042,

3054, 3057

3010

3070

3010, 3083

3071

3014, 3068, 3072, 3073

3011, 3018, 3074, 3075,

3076

3014

3012, 3014, 3020, 3028,

3042

3028, 3042, 3077

3042, 3056, 3070, 3078,

3024

3025

3039, 3079, 3080, 3081,

3082, 3097, 3098, 3099,

3100, 3101

3010

3083

3016, 3042, 3057, 3083,

3084, 3085, 3086

3007, 3008, 3061, 3087,

3088

3040

3045

3026

3007, 3089, 3090, 3091,

3092

3016, 3093, 3094, 3095,

3096

4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 2 2010/08/23 18:25:15

4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 3 2010/08/23 18:25:15

4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 4 2010/08/23 18:25:15

4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 5

Dimensions / Dimensions / Dimensions

Unit : mm (in)

11.5 (1/2)

440.0 (17 3/8)

23.5 (15/16)

16.5 (11/16)

2010/08/23 18:25:16

4.AV7005U_BackPage.indd 6

D&M Holdings Inc.

Printed in China 5411 10549 026M

2010/08/23 18:25:16

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents